JP7183515B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines, such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, execute game effects as the game progresses (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, as game effects, various effects are executed on the screen of a liquid crystal display device in a game machine.

JP 2015-116279 A

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the player's desire to play by increasing the degree of attention, interest, and understanding of the game.

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a predetermined game area of a game board provided with main control means for controlling the progress of a game, an image display means for displaying a variable display image in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the predetermined game area. A detection means that becomes a predetermined detection state when a predetermined object exists in a predetermined area that is the front side of the game area, a movable member that is displaced between a first position and a second position, and the movable member and an effect executing means for causing the image display means to execute a game effect in progress of a game, wherein the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position. The detection means can be in the predetermined detection state when the motion is detected, and the effect execution means is configured to detect the predetermined displacement when the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the displacement means. a first effect executing means capable of executing a corresponding first effect before the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position; second effect execution means for executing a second effect when the presence of an object is detected by the detection means; and means for executing a corresponding reception effect, wherein the predetermined game period is extended when the remaining time of the first effect is longer than a predetermined time while the first effect is being executed. When the remaining time of the first effect is not generated and the remaining time of the first effect is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the predetermined game period can be generated after the execution of the first effect, and a state in which the reception effect is executed is generated. It is characterized in that it is configured such that whether or not to allow it is determined at random.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the player's desire to play by increasing the degree of attention, interest, and understanding of the game .

1 is a front view of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the pattern display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first accessory of the first embodiment is lowered; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a first accessory, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor. It is a figure which shows the detection range of the touch sensor of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor of the first embodiment and the first role object, (a) showing the case where the first role object is at the origin position, and (b) showing the first role object is at the maximum point position. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. 4 is a plan view showing operation buttons of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for internal lottery of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which wins the jackpot generation of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution table which memorize|stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the classification of a jackpot of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the fluctuation pattern table of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the prize-winning process for the starting ports of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of game time control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation|variation start process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the display continuation time of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game state transition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening-and-closing process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning a prize opening process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends according to the first embodiment; 1 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device according to a first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the ROM of the first embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the ROM 93, and (b) is a diagram showing the data structure stored in the common ROM 96. FIG. be. 4 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a register 952 included in the sound output LSI of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process performed with the audio|voice light emission control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game result of 1st Embodiment, and a game state. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination processing of the production|presentation pattern of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation notice part of the notice display of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing timings for generating an advance notice display according to the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for executing announcement display on the sound emitting side according to the first embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an advance notice display generating process according to the first embodiment; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display-side advance notice display execution processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display side role product drive process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the right/wrong table for one-shot announcement of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the sound emission side character product drive execution process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the accessory drive generation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a series of diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a mode transition effect that is executed when the "best result" is obtained in the normal state of the first embodiment; It is a continuation diagram which shows the example of the production|presentation at the time of a big hit (opening/closing execution mode) of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation type (production type) selection process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the first embodiment; It is a figure explaining the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MA of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MB of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MC of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production|presentation pattern of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the sound emission side character product drive execution process of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for executing announcement display on the sound emitting side according to the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the sound emission side role product drive execution process of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flow chart of a production pattern determination process according to a modification of the first to third embodiments; It is a front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device of a fourth embodiment; It is a front view of the game board in a state that the first accessory of the fourth embodiment is lowered. It is a figure which shows the operation announcement part of the announcement display of each operation position of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the determination process of the production|presentation pattern of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the audio|voice emission side character product drive execution process of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a state that the first accessory of the modification of the fourth embodiment is lowered. It is a figure which shows the operation announcement part of the announcement display of each operation position of the modification of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing according to a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing electrical configurations of a sound emission control device and a display control device according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor and the first role object according to the fifth embodiment, (a) showing the case where the first role object is at the origin position, and (b) showing the first role object is at the maximum point position. It is a figure which shows the operation announcement part of the announcement display of each operation position of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flow chart of production pattern determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for executing announcement display on the sound emitting side according to the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the touch sensor detection process of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the sound emission side character product drive execution process of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor and the first role object in a modification of the fifth embodiment, (a) showing the case where the first role object is at the origin position, and (b) showing the first role object. This shows the case where one role object is at the maximum point position. It is a figure explaining the data used for the transition process to the production|presentation of 4th mode M4 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MA of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MB of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to production|presentation MC of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing execution control of the production|presentation of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of a register according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of sequence data according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of a sound and light ROM of the seventh embodiment;

[First embodiment]
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. As a game machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. In the following description, "left", "right", "top", and "bottom" refer to the gaming machine viewed from the front (player's side). In addition, "front" and "rear" shall refer to the side facing the player as "front" and the side far from the player as "rear".

<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, a gaming machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine 10) according to the first embodiment includes a rectangular outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell, and an outer frame 11 that is rotatable forward with respect to the outer frame 11. and a game machine main body 12 attached thereto.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame that is formed in a rectangular frame shape that opens forward and backward and is installed in an installation frame stand (not shown) of the amusement arcade in a vertical posture. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward (toward the player); It comprises a door frame 13 , a back pack unit (not shown) rotatably supported by the inner frame toward the rear side (opposite side to the player), and a locking device 14 . A prepaid card type ball lending device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11 .

The inner frame (not shown) is supported by one of the right and left sides of the outer frame 11 with one of the right and left sides as the supporting side. The front door frame 13 is supported by one of the right side and the left side of the inner frame with one of the right side and the left side as the supporting side. The back pack unit is supported by one of the right and left sides of the inner frame, with one of the right and left sides as the supporting side. The locking device 14 is provided at the bottom of the right side or the left side of the game machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 1), and has a function to prevent the game machine main body 12 from being opened from the outer frame and a front door frame to the inner frame. It has a function that makes it impossible to open to In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the locking device 14 is a cylinder lock. In the first embodiment, when the key is inserted and turned right, the function that prevents the game machine body 12 from being opened with respect to the outer frame is released, and when the key is turned left, the front door frame 13 is moved with respect to the inner frame. The function that makes it impossible to open is cancelled.

The front door frame 13 is provided so as to cover the front side of the inner frame. and a window panel 22 formed therein.

Further, the front door frame 13 has an indicator lamp device 23 as a light emitting means arranged in the upper portion of the window portion 21, and an audio output device arranged in the upper left and right sides and the lower left side of the game machine main body 12. It has a speaker unit 24 as means and navigation means. The display lamp device 23 has a luminous body (not shown) such as a light bulb in which a light-emitting element such as an LED (light-emitting diode), a filament, or a discharge element is enclosed in a glass spherical shell. Also, the speaker unit 24 can output voice, effect sound, and the like. Then, the display lamp device 23 is lit or blinked (light emission effect) in accordance with the pattern variation effect on the pattern display device 51 described later, or the sound or sound effect is output from the speaker unit 24 (voice effect). The lamp device 23 and the speaker section 24 are configured to function as effect executing means.

Further, the front door frame 13 has an upper bulging portion 25 and a lower bulging portion 26 that bulge forward (toward the player) on the lower side of the window portion 21 . The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper receiving plate 251 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving plate for storing game balls. In addition, the lower bulging portion 26 has a lower receiving tray 261 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving tray for storing game balls. The upper receiving tray 251 has a bottom surface that gently slopes from the left side to the right side and is tapered toward the right side. It has the function of leading to

When the game balls become redundant in the upper tray 251, the game balls are discharged to the lower tray 261. - 特許庁That is, the lower receiving tray 261 has a function of storing game balls surplus in the upper receiving tray 251 . In addition, the lower bulging portion 26 is provided with a lever that can be slid in the left-right direction. configured to be discharged from In addition, in the first embodiment, the upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are integrally molded with the front door frame 13 at the lower position of the front door frame 13, and are used to open and close the front door frame 13. Together, the upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are also configured to open and close.

Also, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a shooting handle 27 as shooting means at the lower right position of the game machine main body 12 . The shooting handle 27 is biased counterclockwise (leftward), and when the player rotates the shooting handle 27 clockwise (rightward), the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is actuated. The game balls stored in the tray 251 are shot one by one toward the game area 31R (see FIG. 2) of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. In the first embodiment, the game ball shooting operation by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is performed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in the first embodiment, the number of game balls shot by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The shooting handle 27 is configured so that the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 changes according to the amount of rotation thereof, and as the player rotates the shooting handle 27 clockwise (right). The game ball hitting force of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 gradually increases, and as the player rotates the shooting handle 27 counterclockwise (counterclockwise), the game ball hitting force of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 gradually decreases. It is configured. That is, as the player rotates the shooting handle 27 clockwise (rightward), the reaching position of the game ball launched by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 on the game board 31 shifts from the left side to the right side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the shooting handle 27 is provided with a contact sensor 271 for detecting that the player is touching the handle and a shooting stop switch 272 for temporarily stopping the shooting of game balls. . A game ball is shot by the game ball shooting mechanism 81 when the shooting handle 27 is rotated to turn on the contact sensor 271 and when the shooting stop switch 272 is off. is on, the game ball is not shot.

Further, an operation button 28 as an operation means is provided on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 25 . The operation button 28 is used for selecting the type of effect (type of effect), etc. By operating the operation button 28, the player can select and confirm the type of effect. As shown in FIG. 9, the operation buttons 28 include a decision button 281 arranged in the center, a left direction button 282 arranged on the left side of the decision button 281, and a right direction button 283 arranged on the right side of the decision button 281. and When selecting the type of effect, the player presses the left direction button 282 and the right direction button 283 to select the type of effect, and presses the decision button 281 arranged in the center to determine the type of effect ( confirmed).

Further, the operation button 28 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the pattern display device 51 is to be changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is to be changed. Here, the stage refers to a performance mode in which the various performances displayed on the pattern display device 51 are unified. Various productions such as variable productions and reach productions that accompany the start-up prize) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "coast stage" with a coastal motif, a "person stage" with a human motif, an "undersea stage" with an underwater motif, etc. are prepared as stages. The change of the stage is performed when the operation button 28 is operated by the player during the period when the variable performance is not performed or during the high speed variation.
In addition, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 25, there is a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing the lending of game balls within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit, and a CR unit. A return button (not shown) is provided for instructing return of the inserted card.

<Game board 31>
The game board 31 is a substantially rectangular plate member made of plywood or synthetic resin. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has a guide portion 34 (hereinafter referred to as a guide portion 34) composed of two rails (an inner rail 32 and an outer rail 33) curved in a substantially circular shape provided on the front side (on the player side). (also called guide rail). The guide rail 34 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launching mechanism 81 to the upper left part of the game board 31 . A player plays a game by operating the shooting handle 27 to launch a game ball into a substantially circular game area 31R defined by the guide rail 34 . In addition, at the end of the guide rail 34, a return portion 31a is provided so that the game ball launched into the game area 31R does not return into the guide rail 34. As shown in FIG. A game ball hit into the game area 31R is detected by a hit ball detection sensor (not shown) provided in a back pack unit (not shown). It is configured to output to a computer (not shown). In the first embodiment, the hitting ball detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit, but it may be provided in another location, for example, the game board 31 .

In addition, the game board 31 is subjected to router processing, so that a plurality of large and small openings (not shown) penetrating in the board thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. A first starting port 36 , a second starting port 37 , a variable winning device 38 and an out port 39 are provided at each opening of the game board 31 . The position and number of openings formed in the game area 31R of the game board 31 can be changed as needed. The game board 31 is provided with through gates 41 on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion. A main display device 42 is provided at a position of the game board 31 that can be visually recognized by the player. A variable display unit 43 is provided in the center of the game board 31 . The game board 31 is provided with a large number of game nails 44 in the game area 31R.

In the first embodiment, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it continues to flow down the game area 31R without being discharged from the area 31R. In addition, in order to distinguish clearly from the entry of a game ball into the out port 39, the entry of a game ball into various winning ports is also referred to as winning. Further, entering the through gate 41 refers to continuing to flow down the game area without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area 31R. The entry of the ball into the through gate 41 is also referred to as the entry of a prize in the same manner as the entry of the ball into various prize winning openings.

<Starting Prize Gate>
As shown in FIG. 2, the first starting port 36 and the second starting port 37 are arranged side by side in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting opening 36 positioned on the upper side is a constantly open type winning opening that always opens upward within the game area 31R. In addition, on both left and right sides of the second starting port 37 located on the lower side, an electric accessory (so-called electric tulip) consisting of a pair of opening and closing members 371 configured to open and close the second starting port 37 is provided. The pair of opening/closing members 371 is connected to an electric accessory drive section 372 as a driving means, and the pair of opening/closing members 371 closes the second start port 37 as the electric accessory drive section 372 is driven. It is configured to be displaced between a position and an open position for opening. In the first embodiment, a pair of opening and closing members 371 for opening and closing the second starting port 37 are arranged on the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting port 37, and the pair of opening and closing members 371 are driven toward and away from each other.

That is, in the first embodiment, the first starting port 36 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area 31R can always win prizes with a certain probability, and the second starting port 37 drives the electric accessory driving unit 372. By doing so, the winning probability of the game ball is configured to be variable. Here, in a state in which the opening/closing members 371 provided on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 37 are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter referred to as "electric closed state"), winning of game balls into the second starting port 37 is prevented. Therefore, the probability that the game ball enters the second start port 37 is lower than the probability that the game ball enters the first start port 36.例文帳に追加In addition, in a state in which the opening/closing member 371 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter referred to as the electrical open state), the game ball received by the opening/closing member 371 is guided to the second starting port 37, and is played to the first starting port 36. The probability that the game ball enters the second start port 37 is higher than the probability that the ball wins.

It should be noted that, instead of the electric function closed state and the electric function open state described above, the electric accessory is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 37 (unlike the electric function closed state, the game ball can be entered). state) and a state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 37 may be switched.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 2, the variable prize winning device 38 is a rectangular plate-shaped opening and closing device that freely opens and closes a special prize winning opening 381 (hereinafter referred to as a "big prize winning opening") as a special prize winning means that opens in the game area 31R. A door (opening/closing member, opening/closing means) 382 is provided, and is configured to be displaced between a closed state in which the opening/closing door 382 is closed and an open state in which the opening/closing door 382 is driven by a variable prize driving unit 383 as a drive means. In the first embodiment, the opening/closing door 382 is configured to swing forward and backward to open and close the special winning opening. In FIG. is shown.

In the first embodiment, the opening/closing door 382 is normally set to a closed state in which game balls cannot win. Then, in the internal lottery, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won and the opening/closing execution mode is shifted to, the opening/closing door 382 is set to an open state in which a game ball can win a prize. The opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the opening/closing door 382 is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the big winning opening 381 . Further, in the first embodiment, in the opening and closing execution mode, after setting the opening and closing door 382 to the open state, until it is set to the closed state again is one round game, but the opening and closing door 382 in one round game can be opened and closed any number of times. For example, the opening/closing door 382 may be opened and closed multiple times (two times or more) in one round game. In this case, the open state and closed state of the open/close door 382 are set multiple times in one round game It will happen.

The player maximizes the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 27, and moves the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. The game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like by shifting (so-called right hitting).

<Detection sensor>
The game board 31 is provided with detection sensors 502 to 504 for detecting the entry of game balls in the vicinity of various winning openings such as the first starting opening 36, the second starting opening 37 and the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38. (see FIG. 8). In addition, these detection sensors 502 to 504 are arranged on the back side of the game board 31, the detection sensor 502 detects the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 36, and the detection sensor 503 detects the second starting port 37. The detection sensor 504 detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 . The detection sensors 502 to 504 are wired to the main control board 61 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and detection of game balls by the respective detection sensors 502 to 504 (first start port 36, second start port 37 and the winning of game balls into various winning openings of the large winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38), a predetermined number of winning balls (game balls obtained by winning) are paid out.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when the detection sensor 502 detects the ball entering the first start port 36, and the detection sensor 503 detects the ball entering the second start port 37. When the ball is detected, two prize balls are paid out, and when the detection sensor 504 detects the entry of the ball into the big prize winning opening 381 of the variable prize winning device 38, 13 prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that the number of prize balls to be paid out due to the winning of game balls into various prize-winning ports is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the first starting port 36 and the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 37 may be the same number. In addition, a plurality of (two or more) variable prize winning devices 38 are provided in the game area 31R of the game board 31, and the number of prize balls to be paid out for each prize winning to the large prize winning port 381 of the plurality of variable prize winning devices 38 is varied. Alternatively, for example, when two variable winning devices 38 are provided, the number of prize balls to be paid out by winning to the big winning opening 381 of each variable winning device 38 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

The out port 39 is provided at the bottom of the game area 31R of the game board 31, and the game balls that have not entered the various prize winning ports are discharged from the game area 31R through the out port 39. The out port 39 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and includes a detection sensor 505 for detecting entry of a game ball (see FIG. 8).

Further, each through gate 41 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and includes a detection sensor 506 for detecting the entry of a game ball (see FIG. 8). The detection sensors 505 and 506 are wire-connected to the main control board 61 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10, unlike the case where a ball is entered into various winning holes, When a ball enters 39 or each through gate 41, prize balls are not paid out.

The detection sensors 502 to 506 need only be able to individually detect the entry of game balls into various winning slots, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor or a transmission type photosensor can be used.

<symbol display>
The main display device 42 has a main display unit 46, a character object display unit 47, and a round display unit 48, and includes a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display, or the like. is configured by arranging a plurality of display devices. The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to protrude toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. - 特許庁ing. Also, the distance (gap) between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. For this reason, game balls are prevented from flowing down in the gap between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 , that is, in front of the main display device 42 .

<Main display unit 46>
The main display portion 46 includes a first result display portion 461 for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the first starting gate 36, and a and a second result display section 462 for displaying the result of the internal lottery (see FIG. 8).

<First result display unit 461>
The first result display unit 461 executes the variable display of the symbols with the winning of the first start port 36 as a trigger, and the stop result of the variable display is performed based on the winning of the first start port 36. Display the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 as a trigger, the first result display unit 461 sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally the first result display unit 461 is designed to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 461 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. .

<Second result display unit 462>
The second result display unit 462 executes variable display of symbols with the winning of the second starting port 37 as a trigger, and the result of stopping the variable display is based on the winning of the second starting port 37. Display the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37 as a trigger, the second result display unit 462 sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally the second result display unit 462 is designed to display a plurality of types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as special symbols) depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 462 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode. .

Here, the special figure is a pattern for notification indicating the result of the internal lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit (specific game), and in the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, the lighting position of the LED etc. It is possible to display multiple types of special figures. Specifically, the special figures that can be displayed in the first result display section 461 and the second result display section 462 include a plurality of types of special figures as the jackpot display results that can be recognized as a jackpot, and a loss that can be recognized as a jackpot. One type of special figure is set as a display result. Then, one special figure is determined according to the result of the lottery per special figure, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the previously decided special figure is stopped and displayed in the first result display section 461 or the second result display section 462. be done.

In the following description, the variable display performed in the first result display unit 461 is referred to as "special figure 1 variable display", and as a result of the special figure 1 variable display, the first result display unit 461 is fixed and stopped. Toku-zu is also called Toku-zu 1. Similarly, the variation display performed in the second result display unit 462 is referred to as "second special figure variation display", and as a result of the second special figure variation display, the second result display unit 462 is fixed and displayed special figure is also called special figure 2.

<Accessory display unit 47>
The character object display unit 47 executes variable display of symbols with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. to display the results of Specifically, when a game ball enters each of the through gates 41, the character object display unit 47 sequentially turns on and off to perform a blinking variable display, and finally, the character object display unit 47 Multiple types of normal patterns (hereinafter also referred to as normal patterns) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitely lit. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, the role item display unit 47 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric role open state. do. In this electric operation open state, the opening/closing member 371 of the electric accessory provided in the second starting port 37 is in an open state.

<Round display unit 48>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot determination is won, one jackpot game is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot games (specific games) described later. A plurality of types of jackpot games with different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game won is notified by the round display section 48.例文帳に追加In the first embodiment, two types of “15 times” and “2 times” are set as the number of rounds of the jackpot game. In the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 is provided with two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and when the LED on the left lights up, it is notified that the number of rounds is "15 times" of the jackpot game. When the LED of lights up, it is notified that the number of rounds is "twice" in the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, the main display unit 46 and the character object display unit 47 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as segment displays and dot displays, but are limited to this. However, it may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, a dot matrix, or the like. The patterns to be variably displayed on the main display unit 46 and the character object display unit 47 include a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters, a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, and a configuration for variably displaying a plurality of types of characters. , or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted. In addition, in the first embodiment, the round display unit 48 notifies the number of round games by light emission display using LEDs, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, Other types of display devices such as CRT, dot matrix, etc. may be used to indicate the number of rounds played. The display areas of the main display section 46, the character item display section 47, and the round display section 48 are set to be extremely small compared to the display areas for the notification effect, which will be described later, executed by the pattern display device 51, which will be described later. For a player who pays attention to various effects executed on the pattern display device 51, each information can be easily displayed in the lighting state of the main display section 46, the character display section 47, and the round display section 48. It's getting harder to recognize.

The variable display unit 43 also includes a pattern display device 51 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a pattern, which is one type of pattern. Also, the variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 arranged so as to surround the pattern display device 51 . The upper part of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the falling of the game balls. It is configured. Furthermore, the variable display unit 43 is provided with a first accessory 310 which is a movable accessory for the advance notice effect.

<Pattern display device 51>
The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and is detachably attached to the game board 31 so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 31. It is This symbol display device 51 is triggered by establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37) to display variable decorative patterns for production (hereinafter also referred to as decorative patterns). Start. That is, the pattern display device 51 performs the variable display in the first result display section 461 of the main display section 46 and the second result display section 462 in the main display section 46, respectively. to execute the variable display. The pattern display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or the like, or may be a drum type pattern display device or a dot matrix type pattern display device. Various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and variably displaying various patterns such as .

As shown in FIG. 3, the pattern display device 51 according to the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of pattern display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 capable of variably displaying decorative drawings. Triggered by the winning of the second starting port 37, the decoration figures start to fluctuate in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3. In addition, the effective stop position of the decorative figure is set in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, and the stop symbols that combine the effective stop positions of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed by the symbol variation effect. The pattern combination of the decoration figures to be stopped and displayed on the activated line L is derived. In the pattern display device 51 of the first embodiment, three pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are set in a left and right horizontal arrangement, and each of the pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 has an effective decorative pattern. One stop position is determined for each one, and a pattern variation effect consisting of three rows of decorations is performed. That is, one stop symbol valid line L is set in the symbol display device 51 of the first embodiment. In the following description, the symbol display row Z1, the symbol display row Z2, and the symbol display row Z3 may be referred to in order from the left.

In addition, the display area of the decorative figure in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 51 is composed of a larger area than the first result display section 461 and the second result display section 462, and is particularly The decorative drawing is displayed much larger than the figure. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L of the symbol display device 51 is a big win or is a miss.

The symbol display device 51 is configured to perform variable display so that the decorative symbols move along a predetermined variation direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in the first embodiment) when the symbol variation effect is started. The decorative figures that are variably displayed are stop-displayed in a predetermined stop order at the effective stop positions of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. In addition, the symbol display device 51 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the effective stop positions of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 before the symbol variation effect is completed, and the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed. One pattern variation effect is completed by stopping and displaying the decorative figure. That is, the design variation production (special figure 1 variation display and 2nd special figure variation display) is performed based on one start reservation information (special figure 1 and special figure 2) from the start of fluctuation to the fixed stop It is designed to be executed once.

Here, "variable display" refers to a state in which the decorative symbols displayed at the effective stop positions in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changed in a predetermined order. In addition, the "fixed stop" of the decoration figure means that the decoration figure continues at the effective stop position in each symbol display row Z1, Z2, Z3 for a predetermined special figure fluctuation interval time (for example, 600 ms (milliseconds)). It is the state in which the stop display is displayed. In addition, the "temporary stop" of the decoration figure means that the decoration figure displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 is not stopped continuously during the special figure fluctuation interval time. is. That is, the temporary stop of the decoration image includes a state in which the decoration image is displayed in a swinging state at the effective stop position, and a state in which the decoration image is stopped and displayed for a time shorter than the special symbol variation interval time.

Also, in the first result display unit 461 and the symbol display device 51, the special figure 1 variable display and the symbol variation effect related to the special figure 1 variable display are started, and the special figure 1 and the decorative figure are fixed and stopped. Similarly, in the second result display unit 462 and the symbol display device 51, the second special figure fluctuation display and the symbol variation effect related to the second special figure fluctuation display are started, and the special figure 2 and the decoration figure are fixed and stopped. be. In addition, the first result display unit 461 and the second result display unit 462, the special figure fluctuation display is not performed at the same time, and either the first result display unit 461 or the second result display unit 462 special figure fluctuation If the display is performed, the other special figure fluctuation display is not performed.

Here, in the pattern display device 51 according to the first embodiment, 10 kinds of numbers from "0" to "9" are set as basic decoration patterns in each of the pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. The decorative figures are variably displayed in order in the respective pattern display rows Z1, Z2 and Z3. It should be noted that the pattern display device 51 is not limited to this, and the pattern display device 51 is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the direction of scrolling of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns in each pattern row may be a combination of a picture and a number instead of only numbers, or may be a picture only. In addition, the decoration diagram includes a first identification pattern that allows the player to definitely recognize that a variable probability state (described later) will be given after the end of the jackpot game, and the possibility of being given a variable probability state after the jackpot game. It is classified as a second identification pattern that can be recognized non-deterministically.

Here, as the first identification pattern, it is possible to appropriately set a basic decorative pattern, or to use a predetermined special decorative pattern other than the basic decorative pattern. For example, odd numbers of "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" and even numbers of "0", "2", "4", "6" and "8" are the first , and the even-numbered symbols "0", "2", "4", "6" and "8" can be used as the second identification symbols. In this way, the player can display the decorations of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 which are fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop positions (stop symbol effective line L) of the symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 in the symbol display device 51. From the drawing, it is possible to grasp whether or not a winning game is awarded. In the first embodiment, the winning symbol combination is a symbol combination in which the same decoration symbol is determined and stopped at the effective stop position of each symbol display row (for example, "1-1-1", "2-2-2"). etc.) are set.

The symbol combination of the decoration figures that can recognize the big win becomes the winning display result, and the big winning game advantageous to the player is awarded after the completion of the symbol variation performance. On the other hand, if even one of the symbols in all the columns fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop position of the symbol display device 51 is of a different type, it means that, in principle, a jackpot game is not provided from the combination of symbols, which means that it is a "miss". can recognize A pattern combination of decoration figures that allows recognition of this deviation is a result of the deviation display.

Further, the symbol display device 51 displays a symbol combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the displayed special symbols as a result of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first result display section 461 and the second result display section 462 . That is, the special symbols displayed on the first result display portion 461 and the second result display portion 462 correspond to the symbol combinations of the decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51, and when the symbol variation effect is completed, , The special symbols are confirmed and stopped in the first result display portion 461 and the second result display portion 462, and the decoration symbols are confirmed and stopped in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the symbol display device 51. ing. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the symbol combination of the decorative figures for the special symbols one-to-one, and one special symbol may be made to correspond to the symbol combination of a plurality of decorative figures.

The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp portion 53 provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 51, a second holding lamp portion 54 provided in the lower center region of the pattern display device 51, and a pattern display. A third holding lamp portion 55 provided in the lower right region of the device 51 and a touch sensor 57 provided in the lower left region of the pattern display device 51 are provided.

<Holding lamp>
The first reservation lamp part 53 has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the first starting port 36, and the same number of LEDs as the number of reserved game balls light up. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can reserve up to four game balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs provided in the first reservation lamp portion 53 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls to be reserved. Also, the first pending lamp portion 53 corresponds to the variable display of the first result display portion 461 and the pattern display device 51 . That is, the number of reservations displayed by the first reservation lamp unit 53 is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the first starting port 36, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the first result display unit 461 is performed. be.

The second reservation lamp part 54 has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won the second starting port 37, and the same number of LEDs as the number of reserved game balls light up. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can reserve up to four game balls. For this reason, the number of LEDs provided in the second reservation lamp section 54 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of game balls to be reserved. Also, the second pending lamp section 54 corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 462 and the pattern display device 51 . That is, the number of reservations displayed on the second reservation lamp unit 54 is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second starting port 37, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the second result display unit 462 is performed. be.

The third reservation lamp part 55 has an LED for displaying the number of reserved game balls that have won each through gate 41, and the LED lights up according to the number of reserved game balls. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can hold up to four game balls with the third holding lamp portion 55 . For this reason, the number of LEDs provided in the third reservation lamp portion 55 is also four, which is the same as the maximum number of reserved game balls. Also, the second holding lamp section 54 corresponds to the variable display of the character item display section 47 . That is, the number of reservations displayed on the third reservation lamp unit 55 is incremented by 1 when a game ball enters each through gate 41, and is decremented by 1 each time variable display is performed on the character display unit 47. .

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to notify the number of reserved game balls by lighting the LEDs of the respective reserved lamp units 53 to 55. , 1st starting port 36, 2nd starting port 37 and other configurations such as informing the number of reserved game balls that have won in each through gate 41 may be used. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of LEDs provided in each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 is four corresponding to the maximum number of holdings 4, but for example, two LEDs are arranged in parallel, When the number of holds is "1" to "2", the LED is "lit" in order from the left or right, and when the number of holds is "3" to "4", the number of holds is "blinking" in order from the left or right. may be notified to the player.

FIG. 4 shows a state in which the first accessory 310 descends so as to cover part of the upper side of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 . The first role 310 is, for example, a role that is used in an effect that indicates the degree of expectation for a big win in the variable performance that is currently being performed. It is configured so that it can be recognized by the player. In the present embodiment, as one mode (one-shot announcement) of this advance notice effect, an image emphasizing the movement and light emission of the first role object 310 is displayed on the display screen G while causing the first role object 310 to operate and emit light. By doing so, a mode is prepared in which the player is notified that a jackpot will be won. In addition, in this embodiment, when setting is made to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G in conjunction with or independently of the operation/light emission of the first role object 310, and it is determined that the win/fail result is not a "big win". also provides a mode in which the result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed. A player can increase the expectation of a big win by watching the advance notice effect executed during the variable effect.

In the pachinko machine 10, there are prepared variable performances with a short variation time to variation performances with a long variation time, and normally, the longer the variation time, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. Therefore, in order to give the player a feeling of anticipation for a big win, the variable performance with a longer variable time is configured to execute more advance notice performances. In addition, if the fluctuation time of the variable performance is long, the player may become bored until the stop display is performed. can do. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the game, and can continue to play the game.

The first accessory 310 is a disk-shaped movable accessory when viewed from the front of the game area 31R, and is used for an announcement effect (for example, one-shot announcement). The first accessory 310 is normally located at the original position as the initial position, and is stored above the center frame 52 when the game area 31R is viewed from the front. Then, for example, when the variation effect of the decorative pattern performed by the pattern display device 51 results in a big hit, the first accessory 310 is moved to the center frame 52 at an arbitrary timing while the variation effect is being performed. descend from Then, in the vicinity of the position where the first role product 310 is lowered to the maximum point position, by rotating the first role product 310 clockwise (rightward) in the game area 31R, the player can rotate the first role object 310. A notice effect (one-shot notice effect) is performed to make the character 310 visible and foretell that a big win will be achieved in the variable effect. In this embodiment, the first role product 310 is rotated clockwise (right-handed) in the game area 31R. Alternatively, this operation may be repeated.

In addition, an LED (not shown) is built in near the rotation center of the first role object 310, and by lighting or blinking the LED in conjunction with the operation of the first role object 310, the notice effect is further emphasized. It is configured to be Furthermore, the display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 is controlled so that the brightness around the first role object 310 is increased in accordance with the action of the first role object 310 . As a result, the advance notice effect by the first accessory 310 is further emphasized. In addition, in the variable effect of 1, before the one-shot announcement effect by the first accessory 310 is performed, the first accessory 310 is moved up and down according to the operation of the touch sensor 57 by the player, and the one-shot announcement effect is performed. This first accessory 310 also performs a one-shot announcement chance performance that gives the player a sense of expectation for the performance of the game.

The one-shot announcement chance effect is generated randomly by an internal lottery during the variable effect, and the timing of occurrence is also random. In the case of a deviation in the variable effect in which the one-shot notification chance effect is performed, the first accessory 310 moves from the initial position (the position stored inside the upper side of the center frame 52 (also referred to as the origin position)) to a predetermined position (the maximum The first accessory 310 moves up and down to the position set on the origin position side of the point position), ends the one-shot announcement chance after the lapse of a predetermined time, and returns to the initial position (origin position). .

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the variable performance in which the one-shot notification chance performance is performed, the first accessory 310 reaches a predetermined position only a predetermined number of times (for example, one of 1 to 5 times) determined in advance by lottery. Then, the first accessory 310 descends to the maximum point position, and executes the one-shot notification effect.
As a result, by moving the first accessory 310 up and down, it is possible to heighten expectations for the execution of the one-shot notification performance in which a big win is guaranteed, and to enhance the player's interest in the game. . In addition, since the one-shot notification chance presentation is performed by moving the first accessory 310 up and down according to the operation status of the touch sensor 57 by the player, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. To allow a player to continue the game without getting bored.

It should be noted that the display control device 100, which will be described later and controls the display of the pattern display device 51, determines whether or not to perform the announcement effect (one-shot announcement effect, one-shot announcement chance effect, etc.) using the first accessory 310. . This is because the display control device 100 determines the detailed execution mode (variation pattern) of the variable effect executed by the symbol display device 51 including the advance notice effect. In other words, depending on the detailed variation pattern determined by the display control device 100, it is determined whether or not to perform the advance notice effect using the first accessory 310. FIG.

In the display control device 100, when it is decided to perform a notice effect using the first role product 310, that fact is displayed including the operation mode of the first role product 310 decided to be used in the notice effect. is notified from the display control device 100 to the sound emission control device 90 as a role product action start command.

Next, the configuration of the first accessory 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a). The first accessory 310 employs a rack-and-opinion system as a configuration for moving the first accessory 310 up and down. 310c and a slide gear 310d. Also, although not shown, a first role product rotation motor (not shown) for rotating the first role product 310 is also provided. When the motor for rotating the first accessory is driven, the first accessory 310 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in the game area 31R.

The first accessory vertical motion motor 310a is, for example, a stepping motor, and is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the driving gear 310b at a predetermined step angle. The driven gear 310c meshes with the drive gear 310b and is rotated by the torque of the drive gear 310b. A DC motor or the like with an encoder for detecting the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. The driving mechanism of the first accessory 310 can be constructed at a lower cost than a stepping motor.

The slide gear 310d is a flat plate-shaped bar with teeth cut, is meshed with the driven gear 310c, and can reciprocate vertically as the driven gear 310c rotates. A first accessory 310 is connected to the lower end of the slide gear 310d. Therefore, by driving and rotating the drive gear 310b step by step by the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a, the slide gear 310d is moved up and down step by step via the driven gear 310c. , the first accessory 310 can be moved up and down within the range from the origin position to the maximum point position. In the pachinko machine 10, when the first accessory 310 is at the origin position, if the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a is driven by 100 steps in the direction in which the first accessory 310 descends, the first accessory 310 reaches the maximum. Reach the point position.

The drive control of the first role object vertical motion motor 310a and the first role object rotation motor (not shown) is performed by the sound emission control device 90. FIG. The details of the drive control of the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor will be described later.

A protrusion 310f is provided at the upper end of the slide gear 310d. An origin detection sensor 311 is provided at the position of the projection 310f of the slide gear 310d when the first accessory 310 is at the origin position. Further, a maximum point detection sensor 312 is provided at the position of the projection 310f of the slide gear 310d when the first accessory 310 is at the maximum point position.

Next, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 311. As shown in FIG. Note that the maximum point detection sensor 312 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 311, so description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 311 includes a light-emitting element mounting portion 311a to which a light-emitting element (not shown) is mounted, a light-receiving element mounting portion 311b to which a light-receiving element (not shown) is mounted, and one end of the light-emitting element mounting portion 311a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of one end of a light receiving element mounting portion 311b and a connecting portion 311c that connects the light emitting element and the light receiving element so that they are arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A detection groove 311d is formed by the portion 311a, the light receiving element mounting portion 311b, and the connecting portion 311c.

When there is no insert in the detection groove 311d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attachment portion 311a is received as it is by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attachment portion 311b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 311d, the light emitted from the light-emitting element attached to the light-emitting element attachment portion 311a is blocked, and the light-receiving element attached to the light-receiving element attachment portion 311b receives the light. Can not. The origin detection sensor 311 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when the light is not received. It can be determined whether the insert (protrusion 310f) has been inserted.

In this origin detection sensor 311, the light emitting element mounting portion 311a is arranged on the front side when viewed from the front, the light receiving element mounting portion 311b is arranged on the rear side when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 311c is arranged on the left side when viewed from the front. The projection 310f of the slide gear 310d is inserted into the detection groove 311d so that light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 311 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, by outputting an ON signal from the origin detection sensor 311, the audio light emission control device 90 can It can be determined that the first accessory 310 has reached the origin position.

Also, the maximum point detection sensor 312 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 311, the first accessory 310 is at the maximum point position, and the projection 310f of the slide gear 310d is inside the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 312. It is attached so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked by being inserted. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 312 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the maximum point detection sensor 312 outputs an on-signal, whereby the audio light emission control device 90 can determine that the first accessory 310 has reached the maximum point position.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the detection range of the touch sensor 57. As shown in FIG. The touch sensor 57 is an operation means for receiving an input when operated by a player, and as shown in FIG. 6, the central area of the symbol display device 51 is defined as a detection range AR1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR1 that is set to widen from the lower area of the pattern display device 51 toward the upper right area. By providing the touch sensor 57 so that the diagonal line of the pattern display device 51 and the central line (axis line) of the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 coincide with each other, the design display device 51 can be detected by a single touch sensor. range can be covered. The touch sensor 57 can detect the player's hand (object) when the player holds his/her hand within the detection range AR1. Here, the touch sensor 57 employs an optical system, and can detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection range AR1.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor 57 and the first accessory 310. As shown in FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the origin position and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 7A, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the position of the first accessory 310 is a position that is not detected by the touch sensor 57 .
7(b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the maximum point position and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 7(b), the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 overlap in plan view. In other words, the position of the first accessory 310 is the position detected by the touch sensor 57 .
In the following description, as shown in FIG. 7A, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 do not overlap in plan view, and the first accessory 310 is detected by the touch sensor 57. The state in which no detection is made is also referred to as the first state. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 overlap in plan view, and the first accessory 310 is at a position where it can be detected by the touch sensor 57. This state is also called a second state. In addition to the state shown in FIG. 7B, when the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 overlap in plan view, the first accessory 310 is detected by the touch sensor 57. The first accessory 310 is detected by the touch sensor 57 because it is in the detected position (second state).

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.
The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, as shown in FIG. These devices are mounted on the rear side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 that executes payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out game balls, a power supply that supplies necessary power to the pachinko machine 10, and controls the game ball shooting mechanism 81. • Launch control devices 80, which are mounted on the back pack unit.

The main controller 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main controller 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. The substrate box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace upon its opening. Specifically, as trace means, a circuit board box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting part (crimped part) that requires breaking of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or a structure that peels off At this time, it is possible to adopt a structure in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by the adhesive layer remaining on the object to be adhered is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Also, as the trace structure, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 62 mounted on the main control board 61, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 63 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 64 that constitute the MPU 62. there is The MPU 62 is a semiconductor element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc., as well as the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip, and is called a one-chip microcomputer. be. In the first embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 may be individually integrated into chips. Also, although the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are physically separated individual memories, they may be one memory that is not physically separated, and the ROM 63 area and the RAM 64 area may be provided by logical addresses. . In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-inhibited to have a ROM function. The same applies to the MPUs of other controllers other than main controller 60 .

The ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as a main storage device for the MPU 62 . The ROM 63 is a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply from the outside to retain stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written to. This ROM 63 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses. It has various areas such as an application table storage area 634 . These areas are described in detail later.

The RAM 64 is a semiconductor memory in which information can be written and erased arbitrarily. The RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when reading out and executing the control program stored in the ROM 63, and requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a volatile memory that This RAM 64 has a plurality of areas (regions) logically separated by logical addresses, for example, a various counter area 641, a pending ball storage area 642, an electric power pending area 643, and a stop result storage area. It has various areas such as area 644 . These areas are described in detail later. In the first embodiment, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) or an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) is used as the RAM 64; A memory may be used.

The MPU 62 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitor board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and a plurality of detection sensors 502-506. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 connected to the sound emission control device 90 will be described later in detail. In addition, the output ports of the MPU 62 include an electric accessory drive unit 372 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 371 of the second starting port 37, a variable winning drive unit 383 that opens and closes the opening and closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. 46 and the character object display unit 47 .

Here, the main control board 61 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric role open state, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 372 to open and close the opening/closing member 371 . Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning driving unit 383 to open and close the opening/closing door 382 of the variable winning device 38 . Also, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 46 to display the results of the internal lottery performed based on the winnings to the start ports 36 and 37 . Further, the MPU 62 executes display control of the accessory display section 47 to display the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of each through gate 41 .

The blackout monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power supply/launch control device 80 having the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 80. . The MPU 62 receives power (24 VDC) through the power failure monitor board 65 . In addition, the MPU 62 performs prize winning determination (ball entry determination) to various prize winning ports, the out port 39 and each through gate 41 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 502 to 506 . The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37 .

Based on a command (control instruction) transmitted from the main control device 60, the payout control device 70 supplies the payout device 71 with a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning a prize) or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player). Execute payout control to pay out the

The power supply/launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. The power supply/launch control device 80 includes an AC-DC converter that generates the operating power required for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70, etc., based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. The generated operating power is supplied to each device. The power/launch control device 80 includes a power failure power supply unit such as a backup capacitor. This power supply section for power failure supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

The power/shooting control device 80 executes shooting control for causing the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot game balls. Here, the game ball shooting mechanism 81 includes a shooting rail extending toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper tray 251 onto the shooting rail, and a and a solenoid that is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34 toward the guide rail 34 . The power supply/firing control device 80 turns on this solenoid when predetermined firing conditions (when the firing handle 27 is rotated, the contact sensor 271 is on, and the firing stop switch 272 is off) are met. A drive signal (shooting permission signal) is supplied to the game ball to shoot it.

In the first embodiment, the game ball launching mechanism 81 of the pachinko machine 10 employs a method of launching game balls by linear expansion and contraction of the plunger-type solenoid. A game ball may be hit by the hitting mallet that is attached to the motor, or a ball hitting mallet supported at a different position may be operated to hit the game ball in response to the rotation of the motor. Specifically, in the method of hitting a game ball by a motor, the motor and the ball-striking mallet are supported at different positions, and the ball-striking mallet is operated by rotating a cam connected to the motor. A ball-striking mallet operated by a motor (cam) operates in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of a connected spring or the like to strike a game ball and launch it into the game area 31R of the game board 31 . In the method of hitting a game ball by a rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotating shaft in response to the pulse from the power supply/shooting control device 80, and the game ball hits the game area 31R of the game board 31. fired. A ball-striking mallet directly connected to the rotating shaft of the rotary solenoid hits the game ball on the launch rail by rotating to the game ball supporting position, and the game ball is shot. After hitting the ball, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the ball hitting mallet rotates in the opposite direction due to the recoil of hitting the stopper and its own weight, and stops at the position before operation by the stopper. In the method of hitting a game ball by a plunger-type solenoid, a ball-striking mallet is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger-type solenoid, and the game ball is hit by the straight reciprocating motion of this, and the game area 31R of the game board 31. A game ball is fired to. In addition, there is a plunger-type solenoid that hits a game ball by compressing a spring by retracting the ball-striking mallet when energized, and pushing the ball-striking mallet forward by the elasticity of the spring. Either can be used.

Also, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 81 may be either mechanical or magnetic. In the case of the mechanical type, the power of the motor that drives the ball-striking mallet is used to operate the ball feeding device. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the ball hitting mallet and the ball feeding device is the same, it is possible to supply game balls to the shooting rail one by one according to the timing of hitting the ball with a simple structure. is possible. In the case of the magnet type, apart from the operation of the ball-striking mallet, an independent solenoid operates the ball-feeding operation to supply ball-game balls onto the launch rail one by one. The magnet type is preferably adopted when the game ball shooting mechanism 81 uses a rotary solenoid or a plunger type solenoid to shoot game balls.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery. The "internal lottery" is a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a specific game state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a game ball enters a start winning slot provided on the game board. As shown in FIG. 10, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the big win random number counter C1 for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, uses the big win type counter C2 for the lottery for the type of the big win, and determines whether to generate the ready-to-win display. , the reach random number counter C3 is used. Also, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS to determine the display continuation time on the main display section 46 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether the opening/closing member 371 of the second starting port 37 is to be opened. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 641 (see FIG. 10) of the RAM 64. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds (increments) 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching a predetermined maximum value. Each counter is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 36 or the second start port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 (see FIG. 10) provided in the RAM 64 as acquired information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessary product release counter C4 is stored in the electric role holding area 643 (see FIG. 10) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 41. be done.

The reserved ball storage area 642 includes a first result display section reservation area Ra, a second result display section reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means has four storage areas of a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 in each area Ra1 to Ra4 chronologically. That is, the values are sequentially stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4 from the previously obtained values. Specifically, when the winning to the first starting port 36 occurs a plurality of times in a row, the MPU 62 stores the pending information in the order of the first area Ra1→second area Ra2→third area Ra3→fourth area Ra4. to store

In the first embodiment, since the reservation area Ra for the first result display section has four storage areas, up to four winnings of game balls to the first starting port 36 are reserved. ing. In addition, the reservation area Ra for the first result display section has a storage area for writing the number of reservations, which is the number of sets of values of the reserved jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. is provided. In addition, the number of reservations related to the first starting port 36 is not limited to four, and may be any number, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means comprises four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as reservation information in time series to each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the second start port 37 That is, the values obtained earlier are sequentially stored in the areas Rb1 to Rb4. Specifically, when the winning to the second starting port 37 occurs a plurality of times in succession, the MPU 62 stores the pending information in the order of the first area Rb1→second area Rb2→third area Rb3→fourth area Rb4. are stored chronologically.

In the first embodiment, since the reservation area Rb for the second result display section has four storage areas, the winning of game balls to the second starting port 37 is reserved up to four. ing. In addition, the second result display portion reservation area Rb has a storage area for writing the number of reservations, which is the number of sets of values of the reserved jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3. is provided. In addition, the number of reservations related to the second starting port 37 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

The execution area AE stores the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra or the second result display portion pending area Rb when starting the variable display of each of the result display portions 461 and 462. This is an area for moving.

Since the electric holding area 643 has four storage areas, up to four game ball winnings to each through gate 41 are held. The pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment has two thru gates 41. Regardless of which thru gate 41 is won, if one of the thru gates 41 is won, the operator reserve area At 643, winning of the game ball to the through gate 41 is suspended. In addition, the number of reservations related to the second starting port 37 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, one to three, or may be five or more.

<Description of each counter>
Next, details of each counter will be described.

<Electric accessory release counter C4>
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is stored in the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 41. Stored in reserved area 643 . The MPU 62 draws a lottery as to whether or not the opening/closing member 371 of the second starting port 37 is to be opened based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 643 (electric accessory opening lottery). to run.

<Support Mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as support modes) in which the frequency of opening the opening/closing member 371 that allows the winning of game balls to the second starting port 37 is different. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 371 to the open state is relatively low, and a high frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 371 to the open state is relatively high. and

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery (for example, both 4/5), but the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. , the number of times the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state is increased, and the opening time per time of setting the opening/closing member 371 to the open state is also longer when the power open state is won. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening/closing member 371 to the closed state between each opening in one electric power opening state is shorter than the opening time per time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (role The duration of one fluctuation display in the object display section 47) is shortened.

In the high-frequency support mode, game balls are more likely to enter the second starting port 37 than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the first start-up port 36 than the second start-up port 37, and in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is the second start-up port 36 rather than the first start-up port 36. The probability of winning a prize at the starting port 37 is high. In addition, when the detection sensor 503 detects that a prize has been entered into the second starting port 37, a predetermined number (for example, two) of prize balls are paid out. The game can be played without reducing the number of balls.

Note that the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected reserved time may be configured to be shortened. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening/closing member 371 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening/closing member 371 to the open state with the low frequency support mode. and relatively high. Also, the types of support modes are not limited to two types, and may be arbitrary, and may be three or more types, for example.

<Random number counter for jackpot>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment uses the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI to generate the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears. A jackpot lottery is performed by a plus method determined by a certain value. Specifically, in the jackpot random number counter C1, when the power is turned on, the random number progresses from the initial value of 0, and when the count progresses to the maximum value of 599, the next value does not become 0, and the random number is initialized. The value obtained from the value counter CINI becomes the initial value. Assuming that 100 is obtained as the initial value from the random number initial value counter CINI, the jackpot random number counter C1 counts 100, 101, 102 until it reaches 599, then returns to 0 and continues counting until it reaches 99. , the initial value is again obtained from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, the initial value is changed each time the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one cycle, so that the timing at which the specific random number appears does not appear periodic.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 36 or the second start port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 36, and the game ball enters the second start hole 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing of the winning. Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 .

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing values of random numbers that win the jackpot. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the values of the random numbers that are selected for the occurrence of the jackpot are stored in the hit/fail table storage area 631 of the ROM 63 provided as hit/fail information group storage means (set of hit/fail information), as shown in FIG. is stored as

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning lottery modes, a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big win and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win a big win. . The success/failure table includes a success/failure table for the low-probability mode (low-probability success/failure information group) shown in FIG. group). The MPU 62 executes a lottery for the occurrence of a big hit by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 .

These hit/fail tables have lottery results (hit/fail results) of occurrence of a plurality of jackpots, such as "big win win", "special loss result", and "ordinary loss result". Specifically, under the game state (low probability state) in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. has two values. In addition, under the gaming state (high probability state) in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to for the lottery for the occurrence of the big win, as shown in FIG. 21 pieces. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is included in the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode.

The value and the number of random numbers stored in each success/failure table are arbitrary, and the high probability mode should have a higher probability of winning a "big win" than the low probability mode. Further, the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the high-probability mode must not include the value of the random number for "winning the jackpot" stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode. Alternatively, it may include a part of the random number values that are stored in the success/failure table for the low-probability mode and become the "big win".

In addition, in each win/fail lottery mode, random numbers other than "big win win" results in a loss without winning a big win. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results, ie, the "special loss result (small win result)" and the "normal loss result". All of these outliers are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special deviation result" serves as a trigger for shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. . The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 36 or the second start port 37. It is then stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64 . Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 36, and the game ball enters the second start hole 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (distribution lottery) for the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing values of random numbers related to allocation destinations of types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 12, the random number value related to the allocation destination of the jackpot type is stored in the allocation table (see FIG. 8) in the allocation table storage area 632 (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 63 provided as the allocation information group storage means. minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 12(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 12(b). ing.
The MPU 62 executes a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 .

In the first distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the first result display unit reservation area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the first start port 36 It is a table that is referred to when a jackpot type lottery is performed. As shown in FIG. 12(a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)", "non-explicit small round high probability result (latency high probability result corresponding to small round )”, “explicit small-round high-probability result (high-probability result corresponding to few-rounds)”, and “most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high-probability)” are the distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14 ” (probability 1/6) is distributed to “non-explicit small round high probability result”, “15 to 19” (probability 1/6) is distributed to “explicit small round high probability result”, “20 to 29” (probability 1/3) are assigned to the "most advantageous result".

In the second distribution table, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the second result display portion reservation area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the second start port 37 It is a table that is referred to when performing a lottery for the type of jackpot. The second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 12(b), has two distribution results of "low probability result" and "best result" as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the value "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability result", "10 to 29 ' (probability 2/3) is sorted to 'best result'.

Each sorting result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Winner lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) Aspect of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference between the win/fail lottery modes (1) will be described. The "low-probability result" is a distribution result in which the win-or-fail lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/failure lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. "Unexplained few rounds high probability result", "Explicit few rounds high probability result", and "Most favorable result" are high probability of winning lottery mode after opening and closing execution mode regardless of the winning lottery mode before closing execution mode. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in support mode (2) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the game times reach the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit few rounds high probability result” is a sorting result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open/close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is won in the lottery. The "explicit few rounds high probability result" and "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. . The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball enters the first start port 36 or the second start port 37. is stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 of the RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the first start hole 36, and the game ball enters the second start hole 37. It is stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section of the RAM 64 at the timing of the winning. Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) to determine whether to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 .

The MPU 62 compares the ready-to-win table with the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 642, when the result of the lottery is not "big win" but "normal loss". A lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display, and when the ready-to-win display is to be generated in this lottery, the ready-to-win display is generated. The ready-to-win table is information on the value of the random number associated with the generation of the ready-to-win display, and is stored in the ready-to-win table storage area 633 (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 63 .

Here, when "big win winning" is obtained in the lottery lottery and "most advantageous result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. is stopped on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when "big win winning" is obtained in the win-or-fail lottery and "low probability result" is distributed in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 stops the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. It is stopped and displayed on the valid symbol line L. In addition, if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the winning lottery and is distributed to "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, or "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery In the case of a "special loss result" without becoming, the symbol display device 51 is selected when a "normal loss result" is obtained in the lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number as a stop result. A special combination of symbols having numbers different from each other, which is never repeated, is stop-displayed on the stop-symbol effective line L. - 特許庁

The reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit" in the winning lottery, and is distributed to the "best result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. ), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is used when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("jackpot winning" in the winning lottery, "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability" in the distribution lottery) In the case of being sorted to "probable result" or "special losing result" instead of "big hit winning" in the winning lottery), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The mode of the ready-to-win display is that of a plurality of symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, specific symbol display rows (in the first embodiment, symbol display row Z1 and symbol display row Z3 ) is stopped on the effective stop symbol line L, and the remaining symbol display row (in the first embodiment, the symbol display row Z2) is variably displayed (ready-to-win display). ) has occurred. Specifically, the ready-to-win display is a combination of symbols in which the same decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display row Z1 and the symbol display row Z3, for example, "1 ↓ 1", "2 ↓ 2" ("↓ ” indicates that it is fluctuating). Further, the symbols of the specific symbol display rows (symbol display row Z1 and symbol display row Z3) forming the ready-to-win display are temporarily stopped, and the remaining symbol display rows (symbol display row Z2) are displayed with decorative symbols. After the stop display (temporary stop display), the decoration figures of all the symbol display rows are fixed and stop displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 generates the ready-to-win display, after the variable display is started on the pattern display device 51, and before displaying the predetermined stop result, it becomes a ``big hit winning'' in the winning lottery, and the distribution is performed. It is possible to make the player expect that he or she has been sorted into a "low probability result" or "best result" in the lottery. Note that the ready-to-win display mode is not limited to this, and a part of the symbol rows are stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows are variably displayed, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed in the background as a moving image. Alternatively, each pattern row may be reduced or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image.

In the first embodiment, the main control board 61 of the main controller 60 is provided with a reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 62 is a reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63, and a retained ball storage area. By comparing the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in 642, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to generate the reach display. That is, in the first embodiment, the lottery to determine whether to generate the ready-to-win display is executed by the main controller 60. It may be configured to be executed in

<Expected performance>
Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the pattern display device 51. - 特許庁The expectation effect is such that the player expects that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery after the start of the variable display on the symbol display device 51 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. I mean performance. The aforementioned ready-to-win display is also an expectation effect that occurs when the winning lottery does not result in a "big hit" and results in a "non-normal result", and the pachinko machine 10 has two types of ready-to-win display and advance notice display. It has a kind of expected performance. Since the reach display has already been explained, the advance notice display will be explained below.

<Notice display>
The notice display will not be "jackpot winning" in the lottery if it becomes "jackpot winning" in the lottery, or if it becomes "special losing result" without becoming "jackpot winning" in the lottery lottery. This is an expected effect that makes the effect more likely to occur than in the case of the "normal deviation result". Instead of facilitating the occurrence of effects, this advance notice display may facilitate the selection of effects with a low appearance rate, or may be combined. In the first embodiment, the lottery to determine whether to generate the ready-to-win display is performed by the main controller 60, whereas the lottery to determine whether to generate the advance notice display is performed by the sound emission control device 90. is executed in

As for the mode of the advance notice display, among the plurality of symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, all the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed, or some of the symbol rows are displayed. (for example, the symbol display row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and a plurality of symbol rows (for example, symbol display rows Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed. It is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs both when the reach display is generated and when the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. It is Note that the advance notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed, and the pattern display rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the fluctuation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. . The fluctuation type counter CS is updated at least once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated. Then, the MPU 62 compares the fluctuation table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer, and determines the duration of display of the pattern on the main display unit 46 and the number of patterns on the pattern display device 51. determine the display duration. The variation table is information of random number values related to the display duration, and is stored in the variation table storage area 634 (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 63 as described above.

To explain the reach of the present embodiment in more detail, when winning in the lottery for whether or not to generate reach (when generating reach), the MPU 62 uses the variation type counter CS and the variation for variation stored in the ROM 63 Depending on the table, fluctuation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach are determined. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. The sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined based on the variation type counter CS and the variation table, the reach type of the decorative symbol displayed on the symbol display device 51 A detailed pattern variation mode is determined. As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the symbol display device 51 performs the reach display is determined based on the value of the reach random number counter C3.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern tables, a big win variation pattern table used at the time of the big win and a loss variation pattern table used at the time of the loss are prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern table for loss, depending on whether the game state is a normal low probability state excluding time saving, or a time saving or probability change, a change pattern table for loss (normal) and a change pattern table for loss ( Probable variation) variation pattern table is prepared.

Here, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage is a random number that becomes a jackpot, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the same reservation area is , is determined from the jackpot variation pattern table.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 642 is not a random number that will be a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will be out, the game state is normal except during time saving. When it is in the medium low probability state, the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the same reservation area as the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined from the (normal) variation pattern table for loss, and the game state is changed. When the time is shortened or the probability variation is in progress, a stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the same reservation area as the jackpot random number counter C1 is determined from the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table.

FIG. 13(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a big-hit variation pattern table stored in the ROM 63. FIG. Variation patterns selected in the case of a big hit include various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. From these variation patterns, the variation pattern (variation time ) is selected.

Here, the normal reach variety is a variation pattern with a short variation time of 15 seconds, and a variation pattern in which the first pattern (or decorative pattern) is aligned after a short reach (the pattern is aligned with a so-called bitter stop). Super reach is a variation pattern with a fluctuation time of 27 to 60 seconds, which is longer than normal reach. Pattern) is a variation pattern. Special Reach has a variation time of 90 to 127 seconds, which is a longer variation pattern than Super Reach. It is a variation pattern in which the first pattern (or decorative pattern) is aligned after a special reach different from).

In addition, "various types of reach" means that there are many different effects in each reach. There is a reach that is suddenly displayed, and there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with a notice effect before the start of the fluctuation, and those with a re-variation that will result in a big hit.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the big hit variation pattern table, similar to the variation pattern table for losing (see FIGS. 13(b) and (c)), the game state is normal, during time saving, or during variable probability. , the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS is made different.

Specifically, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS and each variation pattern (variation time) when the game state is normal is normal reach various variation times for the variation type counter CS 0 to 50 15 seconds are associated with the variable type counter CS of 51 to 179, and any of the possible variable times of 27 to 60 seconds of the super reach are associated with the variable type counter CS of 180 to 198 Special Any of the possible fluctuation times of 90 to 127 seconds for each reach is associated. On the other hand, the correspondence between the value of the variation type counter CS and each variation pattern (variation time) when the game state is in the time saving or the probability variation is normal reach various variation times for the variation type counter CS 0 to 149 15 seconds are associated, and the variation type counter CS of 150 to 198 is associated with any of the variation times 27 to 60 seconds that each type of super reach can take.

In the big hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13( a ), when the gaming state is normal, various types of super reach and special reach with long variation times are more likely to be selected as variation patterns. , When the game state is during time saving or during probability change, various types of normal reach with short fluctuation time are likely to be selected as fluctuation patterns.

During normal times, the probability of hitting a big hit is low, so many types of super reach and special reach with long fluctuation times are selected as variation patterns. , it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win. On the other hand, during time saving and probability variation, starting prizes are likely to occur at the second starting port 37 . Therefore, if many variation patterns with a long variation time are selected during time saving or probability variation, it will take time to start the next variation effect, and the player will be in a waiting state, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. be. In addition, it is not preferable from the point of view of the management of the pachinko machine 10 (game machine) because the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 (game machine) is lowered. Therefore, when the game state is during time reduction or probability change, it is configured so that various types of normal reach, which have a shorter fluctuation time than in the normal state, are easily selected, and the next fluctuation display is started early, so that the game can be played. It can reduce the possibility of giving people discomfort. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

Also, in the big hit variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13(a), when the gaming state is during time saving or probability change, various types of special reach are not selected. Details will be described later, but the various special reaches are not selected if they are out. In other words, when the variable performance is performed by the special reach, it means a 100% jackpot. Here, during the probability variation, since it is a game state in which the player always gets a big hit, if the variation production is performed by the special reach during the probability variation, the variation production ends earlier than the joy of the big hit. Then, the player is strongly dissatisfied with the desire to move to the special game state (jackpot state). Since the pachinko machine 10 does not carry out variable presentation by special reach during time reduction or probability change, such player's dissatisfaction can be avoided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the same correspondence between each variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS is set in the game state during the time saving and the probability changing. The correspondence between the pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS may be different. For example, during the time saving, the variation pattern table for big hits may be defined so that various types of special reach are selected as variation patterns. Since a big hit is not necessarily guaranteed during the time saving, the player can have a sense of expectation of a big win by performing a variable performance by the special reach.

Also, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS, but it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another variation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a big hit or a ready-to-win effect before the start of the change or during the change effect, or if the reach is established, the last It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the first symbol (or decoration symbol) to be stopped is to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted to the front or rear, etc.).

FIG. 13(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 63. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13(b), the (normal) fluctuation pattern table for deviation is dedicated to complete deviation referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and other than front-rear deviation reach and front-rear deviation It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of loss, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is associated with each of the divided groups. It is If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area 642 is not a random number that will result in a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss, the game state is normal except during time saving. When in the low probability state, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the reserved area is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table.

For complete failures, there are short failures in which the fluctuation is completed in a short time (7 seconds) and no reach is established, and long failures in which the fluctuation time is longer than the short failure (10 seconds) but no reach is established. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation time are associated with a fluctuation type counter CS of 0 to 98 with a short fluctuation time of 7 seconds, and with a fluctuation type counter CS of 99 to 198. is associated with a long variation time of 10 seconds. In addition, reach is common, but normal reach with a short fluctuation time of 15 seconds, super reach with a longer fluctuation time of 27 to 60 seconds than normal reach, and super reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds. There are various types of special reach that are as long as ~127 seconds. The value of the variation type counter CS and the variation time are associated with the variation type counter CS of 0 to 149 with the variation time of 15 seconds for each type of normal reach, and the variation type counter CS of 150 to 189. is associated with any of the possible fluctuation times of 27 to 60 seconds for each type of super reach, and for the fluctuation type counter CS of 190 to 198, any of the possible fluctuation times of 90 to 127 seconds for each type of special reach is associated. are mapped.

FIG. 13(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (variable probability) variation pattern table stored in the ROM 63. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13 (c), the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, as with the deviation (normal) variation pattern table. It is referred to when the reach is determined only for complete outage with out and long out, and reach other than front and rear out reach and reach other than front and rear out. are divided into groups (groups) based on, and the values of the fluctuation type counter CS are associated with the divided groups, respectively.

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 642 is not a random number that will be a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that will be out, the game state is a time-saving state or a high probability variable. When in the probability state, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the reserved area is determined from the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table.

As for the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation time in the case of complete failure only, the fluctuation type counter CS of 0 to 190 is associated with the short fluctuation time of 7 seconds, and the fluctuation type counter CS of 191 to 198. , is associated with a long fluctuation time of 10 seconds. In addition, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation time in common reach is that the fluctuation type counter CS is 0 to 190, and the fluctuation time of 15 seconds for each normal reach is associated, and the fluctuation type counter CS is 191 to 190. 198 is associated with any of the possible fluctuation times of 27 to 60 seconds for various types of super reach.

Since the losing (probability variable) variation pattern table is a table that is referred to when the game state is during time reduction or during probability variable, the second start port 37 is in a state where the start winning is likely to occur. Therefore, if there are many long-losses during time reduction or probability change, it will take time to start the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. have a nature. In addition, it is not preferable for the hall because the operating rate is lowered. Therefore, when the game state is in a short time state or a high probability state at the time of probability variation, it is configured so that short loss is more likely to be selected than in other cases, and by starting the next variable display early, the game is played. It can reduce the possibility of giving people discomfort. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

In addition, in the loss (normal) variation pattern table and the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table referred to in the case of loss, various special reach that can be selected as a variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, a 100% jackpot is achieved when a variable effect is performed by the special reach. Also, even in the case of a big hit, the special reach is selected as the variation pattern only when the game state is normal, and the probability of selection is low. Therefore, the special reach can be felt by the player as a special variable performance, and the player can be given great pleasure when the variable performance by the special reach is performed.

It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS, but it is also possible to select by using a plurality of fluctuation type counters (select the presence or absence of advance notice display, etc.). In addition, the selection of the type of loss is configured to be divided into a (normal) variation pattern table for loss and a (probability variation) variation pattern table for loss, but even if the game state is normal, there are multiple held balls (for example , 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the variation display may be terminated early, so the selection may be made by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table, or the number of retained balls It may be configured to prepare a normal or probability variable variation pattern table corresponding to .

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table for each deviation shown in FIGS. , short deviation and long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of held balls may be prepared.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the random number generation is performed by the counter circuits (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) that are ICs for generating random numbers. ) can be counted at extremely high speed. In addition, in the case of soft random numbers, it is processed as part of the program control of the game machine, so it is a burden on the software in the limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, the random numbers are generated by hardware. As a result, a random number having a count value several times the soft random number can be generated without imposing a burden on the software.

<Regarding Various Processing Executed by Main Controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advances the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order below. In addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In timer interrupt processing, the MPU 62 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S101 to S105, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 502 to 506, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 502 to 504 provided in various winning ports such as the first starting port 36, the second starting port 37 and the big winning port 381 detect the winning of the game ball, the winning ball A prize ball command for instructing payout is set, and the set command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. - 特許庁For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of game balls, it transmits a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls to the payout control device 70. do.

At step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI to update it, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 when the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 adds 1 to each of the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessary product release counter C4 and updates them. The subsequent value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 if the previous values of the counters C1 to C4 have reached the maximum value when 1 is added thereto. Also, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value each time it loops.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes the winning process for through. Specifically, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 506 provided in each through gate 41 detects the winning of the game ball, the value of the electric accessary product open counter C4 updated in step S103 is electric. It is stored in the winning combination holding area 643 . In addition, the MPU 62 sets a command for executing variable display of the symbols on the character object display unit 47, and displays on the character object display unit 47 the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41. Let In the character object display unit 47, based on the command instruction from the MPU 62, a variable display that blinks and turns on and off sequentially is performed. result) will display the normal map. Also, the MPU 62 sets a command for instructing lighting of the third suspension lamp section 55 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90 . In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the third suspension lamp section 55 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62 . The number of reserved game balls winning the through gate 41 is a maximum of 4, and the third reservation lamp part 55 lights up in the same number as the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes the prize winning process for the start opening. The prize winning process for the start opening will be described in detail below.

<Winning processing for the starting gate>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of winning processing for the starting gate. In the winning process for the starting opening, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 36 (start winning) based on whether the detection sensor 502 provided in the first starting port 36 has detected the entry of the game ball. determine whether or not When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the first start port 36 in step S201 (YES), in step S202, grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra, The reserved number is set in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Ra for the first result display portion as the first start pending storage number RaN. Thereafter, the MPU 62 processes steps after step S205.

When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not won the first start port 36 in step S201 (NO), the MPU 62 detects that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 503 provided in the second start port 37 in step S203. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 37 (start winning) based on whether or not the entry of the ball has been detected. When the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has not won the second starting hole 37 in step S203 (NO), it ends the winning process for the starting hole. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has won the second starting port 37 in step S203 (YES), in step S204, the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is grasped. Then, the reserved number is set in a predetermined storage area in the second result display portion reserved area Rb as the second start reserved storage number RbN. Thereafter, the MPU 62 processes steps after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 sets the number of start suspension memories N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 to the upper limit value (4 in the first embodiment) in step S205. Determine whether it is less than When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the number N of start suspension memories is not less than the upper limit value (NO), it ends the winning process for the start opening. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is less than the upper limit value (YES), in step S206, 1 is added to the value of the start pending memory number N (RaN or RbN). Update.

In step S207, the MPU 62 stores a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the empty storage area of the reservation area for the result display section. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN in step S202, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The set is stored as pending information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the first result display portion pending area Ra, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, the MPU 62 sets the memory area corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. 4 Store hold information in area Ra4.

Also, for example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process A set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second result display portion pending area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 62 sets "3" to the second start pending memory number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to the memory area corresponding to "4" of the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in 4 area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for instructing lighting of the first suspension lamp section 53 or the second suspension lamp section 54, and transmits this set command to the sound emission control device 90. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the winning process for the start opening. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 turns on the first reservation lamp section 53 or the second reservation lamp section 54 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Further, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37 is four. Also, the number of the first reservation lamp units 53 or the second reservation lamp units 54 that is the same as (corresponding to) the number of reservations is lit.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. Normal processing is the main processing for progressing the game. In normal processing, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S314 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when a remaining time occurs, and executes step S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Run. The "remaining time" is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time required for the processing of steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

In step S301, the MPU 62 executes timer interrupt processing or external output processing for transmitting a command set in the previous normal processing to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and when it is determined that the prize ball command is set, transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 70 . Further, in the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether commands for effects such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode are set, and determines whether or not the command for the effect is set. When it is determined that the command for the effect is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. - 特許庁

In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS to update it, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 . Note that the MPU 62 returns the value of the fluctuation type counter CS to 0 when the previous value of the fluctuation type counter CS has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to it.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes game round control processing for advancing the game round. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes a win/fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and selects a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46. Determine related information, etc.

In step S304, the MPU 62 executes game state transition processing for shifting the game state. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each game state such as an opening/closing execution mode, a high-probability mode, and a high-frequency support mode. The game round control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described later in detail.

In step S305, the MPU 62 executes demonstration display execution determination processing. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration has elapsed without a new game round being started after the game round is completed, and determines whether or not the demo is started. When it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Note that the sound emission control device 90 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 62 .

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 3 seconds and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed, and when it reaches 3000 times, the start waiting period is determined to have passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). In addition, when the MPU 62 starts a new game cycle while counting the number of execution times of the process of step S305, the count value is reset.

In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a process for controlling the opening/closing of the opening/closing member 371 provided in the second starting port 37 (hereinafter referred to as "electrical support process"). Specifically, the MPU 62 executes the electric role product open lottery based on the value of the electric role product open counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 643 of the RAM 64, and when the electric role product open lottery is won. , the opening/closing process of the opening/closing member 371 is executed. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 47 so as to display the result of the electric accessory open lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 62 executes game ball launch control processing. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes shooting control to cause the power supply/shooting control device 80 to shoot game balls based on the player's rotating operation of the shooting handle 27 clockwise (right). Let More specifically, the power supply/shooting control device 80 excites the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) to cause the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball. In addition, the solenoid is energized so as to shoot the game ball with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the shooting handle 27 . Specifically, the greater the rotational operation amount of the shooting handle 27, the stronger the excitation, and the stronger the shooting intensity of the game ball. The power/shooting control device 80 shoots a game ball when predetermined shooting conditions (when the shooting handle 27 is rotated, the contact sensor 271 is on, and the shooting stop switch 272 is off) are met. A drive signal is output to the solenoid of the mechanism 81 to shoot the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64 or not. A power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitor board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62 . The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when it confirms the occurrence of power failure. This power failure flag is cleared when the main process is executed next time.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 or the like, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power outage flag by substituting 1 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power outage flag by substituting 0 in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308 (YES), the MPU 62 executes the power failure processing from step S312 onward without executing the processing from step S309 onward. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 62 prohibits the generation of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 64). In step S314, MPU62 prohibits the access to RAM64. After that, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag has not been set (NO), in step S309 it determines whether the timing for executing the next normal process has come, that is, from the time the current normal process is started. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has passed. When the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not yet reached (NO), that is, when the cycle time of 4 msec has not elapsed and the remaining time has occurred, in step S310 , the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311, the variation type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 62 repeats the processing of steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal processing has arrived (4 msec, which is the cycle time, has elapsed).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process (YES), that is, if the cycle time of 4 msec has passed and there is no remaining time, step S301 is executed again. By doing so, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG. In step S401, the MPU 62 executes start-up processing upon power-on. This start-up process is provided with a waiting time for waiting for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) to become operable. Specifically, the MPU 62 waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is a period for prohibiting access to the RAM 64 (hereinafter referred to as permission prohibition period), has elapsed. The MPU 62 repeats the process of step S402 until it determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, the MPU 62 repeats the process of step S402 if it is not determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, and if it determines that 1 sec has elapsed in step S402, it performs the processes from step S403 onward.

In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the processing of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S402 and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 10000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S403, MPU62 permits the access to RAM64. In step S404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power/emission control device 80 is turned on. When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404 (YES), it executes the processes after step S409. If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on (NO), in step S405 it determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 .

When the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag has not been set in step S405 (NO), it executes the processes after step S409. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405 (YES), in step S406, it calculates a RAM determination value (checksum). At step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated at step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (power failure processing) of normal processing. , and if they match, the RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), that is, if it determines that the checksum values do not match, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409 onward. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407 (YES), that is, when it determines that the checksum values match, in step S408, it is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. clear the power failure flag.

In the first embodiment, the checksum is used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64, but the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 confirms the consistency of the checksum value. You may judge by the method different from a method. For example, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 can be confirmed by writing a keyword in a predetermined area of the RAM 64 in the power failure processing and determining in the main processing whether or not the keyword has been written normally. You may Also, a CRC (cyclic redundancy check) or MD5 (hash function) hash value may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 . The method of calculating the checksum is very simple, and for example, the lower one word of the total sum of the individual words in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. For this reason, the effectiveness of data confirmation by checksum is less reliable than other error detection codes, but the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden the MPU 62 even in a limited memory space. can be calculated to

When the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404 (YES), determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405 (NO), or determines the RAM in step S407. If it is determined that the value is not normal (NO), the processing from step S409 is executed. Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 64 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the administrator of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erase switch at the start of business of the game hall. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 even when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed by the power failure monitor board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initialization command to the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the sound emission control device 90) in step S411. Also, the MPU 62 permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing in step S412. After that, the MPU 62 shifts to the normal processing described with reference to FIG. By receiving the initialization command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is being performed normally and initializes itself.

<Game Round Control Processing>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game round control process. In the game round control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG. In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines that it is in the opening/closing execution mode in step S501 (YES), it ends the game round control process without executing the process after step S502. In other words, when it is determined that the open/close execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 36 and 37 is detected.

Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 . The same applies to each of the following steps. Further, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 46 is performing variable display, that is, whether or not a game cycle is in progress. judge. When the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 46 is not performing the variable display (NO), the MPU 62 executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the main display section 46 is performing the variable display in step S502 (YES), it executes the processing for game turn progress in steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 62 recognizes the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and recognizes the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. is equal to or less than "0". When the MPU 62 determines that the total number CRN is equal to or less than "0" in step S503 (YES), it ends the game round control process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the total number CRN is not equal to or less than "0" in step S503 (NO), in step S504, the A data setting process is executed for setting the stored hold information for completion of game rounds. After that, in step S505, the MPU 62 causes the main display unit 46 and the pattern display device 51 to start variable display, executes a variation start process for finishing the game round, and ends the game round control process. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 19, and the variation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display section 46 is performing variable display. If it is determined that the main display section 46 is performing variable display (YES), the game cycle progresses in steps S506 to S509. process.

In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display continuation time counter of the RAM 64 has become "0" or less. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed (NO), in step S507, the MPU 62 executes processing for variable display. In this process for variable display, the MPU 62 updates the display on the main display section 46 during variable display. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the display continuation time has elapsed in step S506 (YES), in step S508, the MPU 62 executes a fluctuation end process. In this fluctuation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information stored in the RAM 64 in any one of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 20), which will be described later (see FIG. 20). (information related to the pattern to be displayed) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display section 46 so as to display the pattern corresponding to the specified information on the main display section 46 during the variable display.

Here, the symbol finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 differs for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm the game result by looking at the main display section 46 at the end of the game round. According to this, the manager of the game hall can easily check whether or not the pachinko machine 10 behaves in the same manner as in the case of winning a lottery to generate a big win. can be done systematically.

The main display portion 46 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display portion 46 are the pattern display columns Z1 to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. It is difficult for the player to recognize compared to ~Z3. Therefore, at the end of the game cycle, the player checks the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 instead of the main display unit 46 to determine whether or not the player has won the big win. Attention to screen G increases.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a fluctuation end command. The MPU 62 transmits the fluctuation end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 62 ends the game round control process. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for ending the effect of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process in step S504 of FIG. 18 will be described in detail. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing. In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG. In step S601, the MPU 62 determines that the second start hold storage number RbN in the second result display portion hold area Rb set in step S204 of the above-described start opening winning process (see FIG. 15) is "0" or less. It is determined whether or not. When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start suspension memory number RbN is equal to or less than "0" (YES), the data for the first result display section (for the first start port 36) in steps S602 to S606 When the setting process is executed and it is determined in step S601 that the second start suspension memory number RbN is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 (for the second start port 37) data setting process.

First, data setting processing for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start suspension storage number RaN in the first result display holding area Ra, and the first start holding stored in the first result display holding area Ra Update the value of the number of memories RaN. In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display portion pending area Ra to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the pending information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the pending information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3. In other words, in steps S603 and S604, shift processing of data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

At step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display section 461 and the second result display section 462 the main display section 46 is to start the variable display when completing the game cycle. is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display section flag, the first result display section 461 changes to the first result display section 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36 when the game round is completed. It indicates that the display should be started.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is voice emission control indicating that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 36. It contains information for the device 90 to recognize.

In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first holding lamp section 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the number of reserved game balls that have won the first start port 36, that is, the first start reserved memory number stored in the first result display section reserved area Ra As the RaN decreases, the number of lights of the first reservation lamp unit 53 is decreased.

Next, data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN in the second result display hold area Rb, and the second start hold stored in the second result display hold area Rb. Update the value of the number of memories RbN. In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the pending information stored in the second area Rb2 of the second result display portion pending area Rb to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 62 executes data shift processing for shifting the pending information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion pending area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the pending information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the pending information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, shifts the pending information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third Shift to area Rb3. In other words, in steps S608 and S609, shift processing of data stored in the second result display holding area Rb is performed by the FIFO (First In First Out) method.

At step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In this step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display section flag, so that the second result display section 462 changes to the second result display section 462 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37 when the game cycle is completed. It indicates that the display should be started.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift is voice light emission control indicating that the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit has been shifted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 37. It contains information for the device 90 to recognize. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp section 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 reduces the number of pending game balls that have won the second start port 37, that is, the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the second result display holding area Rb. decreases, the number of lights of the second reservation lamp unit 54 decreases.

As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 19, the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section is set for completion of the game round (for the first result display section 36). ) data setting process (S602 to S606), and for the second result display section (for the second start port 37) for setting the reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb for completing the game cycle data setting processing (S607 to S611). When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not equal to or less than "0", the MPU 62 sets data for the second result display section without executing the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the process. When the MPU 62 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 36 irrespective of whether or not there is any pending information stored in the first result display holding area Ra, the holding information stored in the second result holding holding area Rb is preferentially used for completing the game cycle. set to

<Change Disclosure Processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 of FIG. 18 will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.

In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is not the high-probability mode (NO), the win/fail table for the low-probability mode (see FIG. 11A) is stored in the win/fail table storage area 631 of the ROM 63 in step S702. read from If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the win/loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode (YES), then in step S703 the win/fail table for the high-probability mode (see FIG. 11B) is stored in the win/fail table of the ROM 63 Read from storage area 631 .

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes the suitability determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 62, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, the success or failure table for the low probability mode read in step S702 or the success or failure table for the high probability mode read in step S703 The result of the winning lottery (winning result) is determined by comparing with. In addition, the success or failure result is one of "jackpot winning", "special failure result", and "normal failure result". ”, “Special Outlier Result”, and “Normal Outlier Result”.

In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "big hit". If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "jackpot winning" (YES), it executes the processes after step S706, and if it determines that the win/loss result is not "jackpot winning" in step S705 ( NO), the process after step S712 is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is "big win" (YES), in step S706 it determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64 .

Here, when the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, it indicates that the first result display section 461 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 36 starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64 (NO), in step S707 the first distribution table (see FIG. 12A) is stored in the ROM 63. is read out from the distribution table storage area 632 of .

Also, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, it indicates that the second result display section 462 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37 starts the variable display. Therefore, if the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag has been set in the RAM 64 (YES), in step S708 the second distribution table (see FIG. 12B) is stored in the ROM 63. is read out from the distribution table storage area 632 of .

After performing the process of step S707 or step S708, MPU62 performs a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to determine the result of the distribution lottery ( distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 461 or the second result display portion 462 of the main display portion 46, and determines the determined information. In other words, the RAM 64 stores information relating to the symbol to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 62 compares the sorting result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46. to decide. The stop result table for the jackpot results defines the mode of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 so as to be different for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag, and specifies that it is a "non-explicit small round high probability result", If the non-explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified as "best result" If so, set the best result flag. Then, MPU62 performs the process after step S716. In addition, in the processing of each step below, the MPU 62 refers to the presence or absence of a flag set in the RAM 64 to determine the sorting result.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the win/loss result is not "big win winning" (NO), in step S712, it determines whether or not the win/loss result determined in step S704 is "special loss result". When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the win/loss result is the “special outlier result” (YES), it executes the processing from step S713 onwards, and determines in step S712 that the win/fail result is not the “special outlier result”. In the case (NO), the processing after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the special outlier result. In this stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 461 or the second result display portion 462 of the main display portion 46, and The RAM 64 stores information, that is, information relating to the symbols to be stopped and displayed. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 46 by referring to a stop result table for special outlier results stored in advance in the ROM 63 . The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the big win result. At step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64. FIG. In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to the presence or absence of the special loss flag set in the RAM 64 to determine whether the win/loss result is the "special loss result".

In step S715, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the normal deviation result. In this stopping result setting process for the out-of-ordinary result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display portion 461 or the second result display portion 462 of the main display portion 46, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 64 . Here, the MPU 62 refers to a stop result table for out-of-normal results pre-stored in the ROM 63 to determine information related to symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 46 . It should be noted that the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special losing result.

After executing any of the processes of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes a process of setting the display duration (display duration) in step S716. The processing for setting the display continuation time (display continuation period) will be described later in detail.

At step S717, the MPU 62 sets the variation command and the type command. The MPU 62 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 16). The sound emission control device 90 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62, and the processing will be described later in detail.

Note that the variation command includes information regarding the display duration time, but does not include information regarding whether or not the ready-to-reach display will occur. In addition, the type command includes information related to win/fail results and information related to sorting results. More specifically, the type command includes each piece of information related to "jackpot win", "special loss result", and "normal loss result" as information related to win/fail results. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the sorting result, each information related to "low probability result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "best result" It is included. It should be noted that in the following description, the win/fail result and the sorting result are also collectively referred to as the game result. That is, the type command includes information about the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display section 46 to start variable display based on the determination result. Here, if the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, when the game cycle is completed, the first result display section 461 starts to display a variable display based on the winning of the game ball into the first start port 36. indicates that the

Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines in step S718 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 64, it causes the first result display section 461 to start variable display in step S719. Further, when the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display section 462 is made to start the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 37 when completing the game round. It is shown that. Therefore, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 causes the second result display section 462 to start variable display in step S718.

<Display duration setting processing>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display duration setting process. In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S808 as shown in FIG. In step S<b>801 , the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64 . Also, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the symbol display device 51 will display the ready-to-win state. Specifically, in step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether the sorting result determined in step S709 is the "low probability result" or the "best result".

In step S802, when the sorting result is the "low probability result" or "best result" (YES), in step S803, the MPU 62 determines that the success/failure result determined in step S704 of FIG. Determine whether it is If the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result is the "normal deviation result" (YES), in step S804, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 63 and the reach stored in the reserved ball storage area 642 A ready-to-win generation lottery is executed by comparison with the value of the random number counter C3.

In step S805, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs in the ready-to-win occurrence lottery in step S804. When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display occurs in step S805 (YES), the MPU 62 refers to the display duration table for reach occurrence stored in the ROM 63 in step S806. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result is not the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" in step S802 (NO), when it determines that the success/failure result is not the "normal result" in step S803 (NO), or if it is determined in step S805 that the reach display does not occur (NO), the display duration table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 63 is referred to in step S807.

In step S808, the MPU 62 determines the display continuation time after executing the process of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, the MPU 62 is based on the reach occurrence display duration table referred to in step S806 or the reach non-occurrence display duration table referred to in step S807, the variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of Also, the MPU 62 sets the display continuation time determined in step S807 to the display continuation time counter provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 .

In the first embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 in FIG. 21, the MPU 62 is stored in the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 633 of the ROM 63 and the retained ball storage area 642. A lottery as to whether or not to generate the ready-to-win display is executed by comparing the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 received. can be configured to run.

Here, in the first embodiment, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the pending number increases. In other words, the display duration time for consuming the pending information related to the first starting port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the first starting port 36 increases. Further, the display duration time when the pending information related to the second starting port 37 is consumed is set to be shorter as the number of pending items related to the second starting port 37 increases. When the maximum value (four) of the reserved number is exceeded and a prize is won at the first starting port 36 or the second starting port 37, prize balls can be paid out, but a jackpot lottery cannot be received. However, as in the present embodiment, the display duration time is shortened as the number of reserved balls increases, and the game cycle is completed quickly, so that the state in which the maximum number of reserved balls is exceeded and the prize is won. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the player can win the lottery but cannot receive the big winning lottery, thereby providing a game state advantageous to the player.

Further, in the reach non-occurrence display duration table, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display duration is set to be shorter than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. That is, when the pending number is the same, the display continuation time in the high-frequency support mode is set shorter than the display continuation time in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, the display continuation time table for reach occurrence and the display continuation time table for reach non-occurrence are set so that the display continuation time is different from each other.

Thus, in the first embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are different from each other. Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the ready-to-win display occurs is not included in the variation command, the ready-to-win display is performed by the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, based on the information on the display duration time. can be determined whether or not occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur.

In the first embodiment, the reach non-occurrence display duration table has the display duration shortened as the number of reservations increases, but the display duration increases as the number of reservations increases. The relationship may be opposite to that of the embodiment, and may be configured so that the display continuation time does not fluctuate (change) according to the number of pending items or the support mode. Also, the reach occurrence display duration table and the reach non-occurrence display duration table may be the same. In this case, regardless of whether reach occurs or not, the same display duration table is referenced to determine the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer, and the various counters in the RAM 64 are determined. A display continuation time counter provided in area 641 may be set. Furthermore, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the win/fail result and the sorting result.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of game state transition processing. In the game state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S914 as shown in FIG. In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the open/close execution mode is not in progress (NO), it executes the processing of steps S902 to S910. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress (YES), it executes the processing of steps S911 to S914.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S902 it determines whether or not the variable display on the main display section 46 has ended. When the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display on the main display section 46 has not ended (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display section 46 has ended (YES), in step S903 it determines whether the success/failure result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is "big win winning" or "special losing result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (NO), that is, when it determines that the win/fail result is the "normal deviation result", the game state transition processing is performed. finish. If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (YES), the MPU 62 sets a flag in the opening/closing execution mode in the RAM 64, and then in step S904 is a "special outlier result".

When the MPU 62 determines in step S904 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result" (YES), the MPU 62 sets "2" to the open/close counter SOC provided in the counter area 641 of the RAM 64 in step S905. This open/close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of opening and closing times of the big winning opening 381 of the variable winning device 38 in the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the success/failure result is not the "special loss result" in step S904 (NO), that is, when it determines that the success/failure result is "big hit", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not it is a round high-probability result (“implicit small-round high-probability result” or “explicit small-round high-probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the result of distribution is the result of a small number of rounds with high accuracy (YES), in step S907, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 is set to "2". . In addition, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a high-probability result for a small number of rounds (NO), that is, when it determines that the distribution result is a "low-probability result" or a "best result", In step S908, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with mutually different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as opening/closing execution modes, a number-of-rounds stipulation mode that shifts to when the win/fail result is a "jackpot win", and an opening/closing number mode to shift to when the win/fail result is a "special losing result". and a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The opening/closing number regulation mode ends under the condition that the large winning opening 381 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning opening 381. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 381 corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the big winning hole 381 once per round game. Also, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the opening/closing door 382 to the open state, and then satisfies one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) to satisfy one of the opening/closing doors. 382 is set to the closed state again.
(1) Elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) (2) The total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 381 reaches a predetermined upper limit number

After executing any one of steps S905, S907, and S908, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64 as waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S909. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. In addition, the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning design (special design).

Thus, when the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the win/fail result corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. . In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be subtly different according to the type of game result to such an extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

At step S910, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process. Here, the opening command includes the information of the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the MPU 62 sets in step S910 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 16). An opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 . Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode (YES), in step S911, the MPU 62 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the processing for opening and closing the big winning opening at step S911 will be described later in detail.

In step S912, the MPU 62, after executing the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911, determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. judge.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are less than or equal to "0" (YES), the value of the timer counter T is set to "0" in step S913. Determine whether or not:

When the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" in step S913 (NO), it ends the game state transition processing. If the MPU 62 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" (YES), in step S914, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Execute transition processing at the end of the mode. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the game state transition process.

Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process in step S911 of FIG. 22 will be described in detail.
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process. In the big winning opening opening/closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1019 as shown in FIG. In step S1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the big winning opening 381 is open. When the MPU 62 determines that the large winning opening 381 is not open in step S1001 (NO), it executes the processes after step S1002. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the big winning opening 381 is open in step S1001 (YES), the process after step S1006 is executed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the big winning opening 381 is not open (NO), in step S1002, the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less, and the value of the round counter RC is "0". Determine whether or not: When the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are equal to or less than "0" (YES), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), in step S1003, the value of the timer counter T is set to "0". ” or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" at step S1003 (YES), at step S1004, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening opening process. It should be noted that the special prize opening opening process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

At step S1005, the MPU 62 sets an open command. In addition, the MPU 62 transmits the open command set in step S1005 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 16). After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 382 has been set to the open state, and executes predetermined processing.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 381 is open (YES), in step S1006 it determines whether the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, that is, whether the large winning opening is open. It is determined whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the processing has elapsed.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), in step S1007 it determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large prize winning opening 381 . It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 381 is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 504 corresponding to the large winning opening 381 .

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 381 (NO), it ends the large winning opening opening/closing process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the big prize opening 381 (YES), in step S1008, the value of the prize counter PC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1009, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is equal to or less than "0" in step S1009 (YES), in step S1010, the MPU 62 executes closing execution processing. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open/close door 382 to the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 383 .

In step S1011, the MPU 62 sets a closing command. The MPU 62 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 16). Based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 62, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening/closing door 382 has been set to the closed state, and executes predetermined processing.

In step S1012, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result". When the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is the "special loss result" (YES), the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1018, which will be described later.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1012 that the win/fail result is not the "special loss result" (NO), it executes the processing from step S1013 onward. In step S1013, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it. Also, in step S1014, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is set to the open standby state from when the open/close door 382 is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again until the open/close door 382 is set to the open state again. stipulates the time. In the first embodiment, the waiting time for opening is set to 1 second, but the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type and progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is equal to or less than "0" in step S1014 (YES), it executes the processing after step S1016. In step S1016, the MPU 62 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for ending. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 seconds. It should be noted that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning design (special design).

The waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for the opening. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be slightly different according to the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending is greatly different between the game result of "low probability result" or "best result" and the game result other than these. It is good also as a structure which makes it differ greatly according to the kind.

In step S1017, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. The MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the above-described normal processing (see FIG. 16). After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process. Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is equal to or less than "0" in step S1006 (YES), it executes the processes after step S1010 described above. Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is the “special loss result” in step S1012 (YES), in step S1018, the value of the open/close counter SOC is updated by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S1019, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open/close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not equal to or less than "0" (NO), it executes the processes after step S1015 described above. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open/close counter SOC is equal to or less than "0" (YES), it executes the processes after S1016 described above.

Next, the special winning opening opening process in step S1004 of FIG. 23 will be described in detail.
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process. In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1106 as shown in FIG. At step S1101, the MPU 62 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. FIG. In step S1102, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the win/loss result is a "special losing result". When the MPU 62 determines in step S1102 that the win/loss result is the "special loss result" (YES), it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the win/fail result is not the “special loss result” in step S1102 (NO), in step S1104, the allocation result is the few rounds high probability result (“non-explicit few rounds high probability result” or “Explicit small round high probability result”).

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the result of allocation is the low-round high-probability result (YES), it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 62 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1104 that the allocation result is not the small round high probability result (NO), it sets "15000" to the timer counter T in step S1105. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 62 executes the opening execution process of the big winning opening 381 in step S1106. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the opening/closing door 382 to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning driving section 383 . After that, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening opening process.

It should be noted that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning opening 381 . Also, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1105 defines the upper limit duration time from when the open/close door 382 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit duration time with different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000", as described above. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball shooting mechanism 81 to shoot a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball shooting mechanism 81 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, the MPU 62 sets the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls to the big winning opening 381 to eight by setting the winning counter PC to "8". Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode (30 sec) is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls into the big winning hole 381 and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit is 8. It is easy to let the game ball win the big prize opening 381. On the other hand, since the upper limit duration (0.17 sec) of the short-time mode is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 381 . It should be noted that it is possible to win about one game ball into the big winning hole 381 depending on the timing.

Next, the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 22 will be described in detail.
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends. In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1201 to S1212 as shown in FIG.

In step S1201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the sorting result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result". When the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (YES), in step S1202, the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 62 clears the count limit flag stored in the RAM 64. FIG.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued at least until "big win" is won in the lottery if the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set.

At step S1204, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag to the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When ending the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flags (low probability result flag, non-explicit small round high probability result flag, explicit small round high probability clear the most favorable result flag) and the special outlier flag. Further, in step S701 of the above-described fluctuation start process (see FIG. 20), the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64, thereby determining whether the lottery mode is the high probability mode. is determining whether

Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit few rounds high probability result" (NO), in step S1205 the distribution result is the "non-explicit few rounds high It is determined whether or not it is a “definite result”. When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is the "non-explicit small round high probability result" (YES), in step S1206 it determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64. .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 (YES), it executes the processing from step S1203 described above. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64 (NO), it sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1207. The MPU 62 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the winning/failing lottery mode to the high-probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is achieved in the winning lottery. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1205 that the allocation result is not the "non-explicit small round high probability result" (NO), in step S1208 it determines whether the allocation result is the "low probability result". .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1208 that the sorting result is not the "low-probability result" (NO), that is, if it determines that the success/failure result is the "special failure result", transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends exit.
Further, when the MPU 62 determines that the sorting result is the "low probability result" at step S1208 (YES), at step S1209, the high probability mode flag is cleared. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued at least until a "big win" is obtained in the winning lottery and the distribution result is other than "low-probability result".

At step S1210, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. FIG. The MPU 62 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 64 . Thereby, the MPU 62 sets or maintains the support mode to the high-frequency support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 62 sets "100" to the value of the number-of-games counter provided in the various counter areas 641 of the RAM 64. FIG. At step S1212, the MPU 62 sets a count limit flag in the RAM 64. FIG. If the number limit flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains it. After that, the MPU 62 terminates the transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games, which is the end reference number of times set in the number-of-games counter, are counted. Continue until digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 games have been played. Thereby, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Note that the MPU 62 executes these processes as electrical support processes in step S306 of the normal process (see FIG. 16) described above, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning lottery results in a "big win" and the allocation result in the distribution lottery becomes "most advantageous result" or "explicit small round high probability result", the game state is the current game state. Regardless, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

Also, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the allocation result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the game state After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the win-or-loss lottery results in a "jackpot win", and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the "non-explicit small round high probability result". After the open/close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode), the game state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result in the distribution lottery results in a "low probability result", the game state will be the open/close execution mode (that is, the number of rounds) regardless of the current game state. After the specified mode) ends, the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until "big win" is achieved in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is low-frequency support when 100 game rounds are completed without "big win" in the lottery. mode.

Also, when the winning lottery does not result in a "big win", that is, when the winning result in the winning lottery is a "special losing result" or a "normal losing result", the game state does not shift.

<Electrical Configuration of Audio Light Emission Control Device 90 and Display Control Device 100>
FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. As shown in FIG. 26, the sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91, an MPU 92 mounted on the sound emission control board 91, and a ROM 93 and a RAM 94 that constitute the MPU 92. Here, the MPU 92 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are combined into a chip.

The ROM 93 is configured to use a memory that does not require external power supply for memory retention, such as a NOR-type flash memory or a NAND-type flash memory (that is, non-volatile storage means), as a read-only memory. The ROM 93 has a plurality of areas logically separated by logical addresses, and each area stores fixed value data used in executing various control programs and processes according to the programs. ing. The MPU 92 controls execution of effects based on instructions from the main controller 60 by executing processing according to control programs stored in the ROM 93 . Since the ROM 93 is chipped with the CPU and connected via an internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity, and specifically, its data capacity is 2 Mbytes.

The RAM 94 is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply to hold data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and the same , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 93 when the data capacity is compared. The RAM 94 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas, for example. The RAM 94 temporarily stores various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93 . Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 92 has an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). An input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the main controller 60 . Also, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the operation button 28 and the touch sensor 57 . The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the display lamp device 23, the first to third reserve lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, the light emitting element driving unit 29, the display control device 100, and the like. The MPU 92 executes drive control of the display lamp device 23, the first to third suspension lamp units 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, etc., based on commands transmitted from the main controller 60. FIG. Also, the MPU 92 analyzes a command transmitted from the main control device 60 to determine the content of the effect for a predetermined period of time, and transmits a command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 100 . A signal path provided to connect the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 is used for this command transmission. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness having connectors at both ends of a signal line.

The MPU 92 executes light emission control not only of the display control device 100 but also of the display lamp device 23 when the content of the presentation for the predetermined period is determined. In this case, although FIG. 26 shows that the sound emission control board 91 and the indicator lamp device 23 are directly connected, the sound emission control board 91 and the indicator lamp device are not limited to this. 23 may be interposed between the relay substrates.

The MPU 92 executes drive control of the speaker unit 24 when determining the content of the effect in the predetermined period. The sound output LSI 95 and common ROM 96 are used for drive control of the speaker unit 24 .

The common ROM 96 is configured to read-only use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for memory retention, such as a NOR-type flash memory or a NAND-type flash memory. Since the common ROM 96 is not directly connected to the MPU 92 but externally attached to the sound output LSI 95, it is easier to increase the data capacity than the ROM 93. Specifically, its data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

The sound output LSI 95 includes an I/F 951 , a register 952 , a sound data processing section 953 , a DAC 954 and a data transfer section 955 . The sound output LSI 95 executes control for outputting sound from the speaker section 24 according to data transmitted from the MPU 92 .

The I/F 951 is an interface for the sound output LSI 95 to communicate with the MPU 92 via a bus B1 provided as a signal path group for two-way communication. A bus B1 connected to the I/F 951 is composed of eight signal paths, and data is transmitted and received between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95 via each signal path.

The register 952 has a function as storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 95, and uses a memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data for both reading and writing. is configured to In addition, random access is possible, and the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 when compared with the same data capacity.

The register 952 has a data capacity of multiple bytes so that it can store a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 953 converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 92 and stored in the register 952 so that they can be used for sound output, and outputs the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 96. It has a function of creating digital musical sound data using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data defining the pitch, volume, and timbre of sounds at a predetermined timing. there is

The sound data processing section 953 has a function of a plurality of sound generation channels so that a plurality of different sounds can be output at the same time. has a function to create Although 16 channels are provided as a plurality of tone generation channels, the number of channels is arbitrary. Also, by using virtual tracks, it is possible to use a larger number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) than the actual number of sound generating channels, but a configuration that does not use virtual tracks is also possible.

The DAC 954 is a digital/analog converter and includes an analog signal amplifier circuit. The DAC 954 has a function of outputting to the speaker section 24 after amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting the digital musical tone data or the digital synthesized musical tone data created by the sound data processing section 953 into an analog signal.

The data transfer unit 955 is connected to the common ROM 96 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring data read from the common ROM 96 to the register 952. ing. A bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of signal paths is greater than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the I/F 951. number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 955 and the common ROM 96 is faster than the data communication speed between the MPU 92 and the I/F 951 . Based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data in the sound data processing unit 953 , the data transfer unit 955 reads sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 96 and stores it in the register 952 .

Here, the data transfer unit 955 not only has a function of transferring sound data required by the sound data processing unit 953 to the register 952, but also reads data required by the MPU 92 from the common ROM 96 and stores it in the register 952. It has a function of transferring data stored in the register 952 to the MPU 92 . A configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of ROM 93 and common ROM 96>
First, the data configurations of the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the ROM 93, and FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the common ROM 96. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the ROM 93 stores a program and processing data (1), a program and processing data (2), . and processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include data tables used to execute each effect, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 95 . Programs and data for processing necessary for executing processing for effect control in the MPU 92 are all stored in the ROM 93 .

The ROM 93 stores not only the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2), . Light emission data (1), light emission data (2), . . . , light emission data (Q) are stored in advance. In each of these light emission data, information on the type of light emitting portion to be turned on in the display lamp device 23, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set for a predetermined effect period. It differs depending on the type of each light emission data. Each light emission data stored in the ROM 93 has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the common ROM 96 stores sound data (1), sound data (2), . Data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling melodies and sounds actually produced by musical instruments corresponding to various timbres, and melodies with lyrics are produced by musical instruments corresponding to various timbres. It contains waveform data obtained by sampling the voice in addition to the melody. All sound data are stored in the common ROM 96 . The sound data stored in the common ROM 96 includes sound data (music data and sound data) corresponding to music (BGM) and sounds used in productions A to D shown in FIG. Sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voice used in the production of the first mode M1 to the fifth mode M5, music and voice used in the production MA to MC of the fourth mode in FIG. Corresponding sound data (music data and voice data) and the like are included.

Sound data is digital signal data obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train with a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantized signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantized signals is 16 bits. Therefore, the sound waveform data composed of analog signals for 1 sec has a data amount of 1*44.1 k*16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set to be readable from the common ROM 96 for each pulse code modulated data, that is, for each sample. That is, an address is set for each data of one sample, and the data transfer section 955 of the sound output LSI 95 can transfer data from the common ROM 96 in units of data of one sample.

The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz, and may be 32 kHz, 48 kHz, or 96 kHz, for example, as long as good sampling can be achieved. Also, the number of quantized signals is not limited to 16 bits, and any number of bits other than 16 bits may be used as long as good quantization can be achieved.

Returning to the description of FIG. 27(b), the common ROM 96 stores not only sound data (1), sound data (2), . ), . . . , light emission data (R) are stored in advance. Each of these light emission data has a different target light emission control period and a different light emission pattern.

As described above, the light emission data used by the MPU 92 is stored not only in the ROM 93 directly connected to the MPU 92 of the MPU 92 but also in the common ROM 96 connected to the sound output LSI 95. . In other words, the light emission data are distributed and stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 .

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96 in this manner, the data capacity of the light emission data can be increased without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 93 . In particular, since the ROM 93 is connected via the internal bus within the MPU 92, it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity, as already explained. Then, it becomes necessary to extend the internal bus width, and it is not easy to deal with it. On the other hand, as already explained, the common ROM 96 is not directly connected to the MPU 92, but externally attached to the sound output LSI 95, resulting in an increased data capacity. is relatively easy. By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 96, it is possible to cope with an increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Also, basically, when data is set in the ROM, about several percent (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is blank (unused area). In this case, assuming that the data capacity of the common ROM 96 is 1 Gbytes, the blank is 20 Mbytes. This data capacity is larger than the data capacity of the ROM 93, which is 2M bytes. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such a blank.

Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to melodies and voices for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. As a result, it becomes difficult to adapt the data capacity of the sound data, and from this point as well, the common ROM 96 tends to become blank. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data using such blanks.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 96 is used by the MPU 92, and when the MPU 92 needs to use it, it is shared by the sound output LSI 95 in response to a transfer instruction from the MPU 92. Light emission data is read from the ROM 96 and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 92 . For this transfer, the bus B1 connecting the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95 is used. That is, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 96 is transferred to the MPU 92 using a signal path for data transfer from the MPU 92 to the sound output LSI 95 or from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92 . As a result, for example, a ROM different from the ROM 93 is externally attached to the MPU 92, and surplus light emission data is stored in the ROM, without increasing the number of signal paths. can be stored.

Of the programs and processing data used by the MPU 92 and the light emission data, all of the programs and processing data are stored in the ROM 93, and part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96. By doing so, it becomes possible to distribute data satisfactorily. In other words, if the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 96, a separate program and processing data are required to transfer the program and processing data to the RAM 94 of the MPU 92, which complicates the design of the program. become something. On the other hand, for the light emission data, the address where the light emission data is originally stored is grasped, the light emission data is read based on the address, transferred, and developed so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data are distributed, the design of the program is unlikely to become complicated.

Further, when a production-related command is transmitted from the main control device 60, the MPU 92 first executes a predetermined process corresponding to the command using a program, and uses light emission data in the process of executing the predetermined process. to control the indicator lamp device 23 . In other words, the program needs to be read abruptly in response to the reception of a command from the main control unit 60, and the read timing is highly arbitrary. Read timing is less arbitrary. In addition, since the light emission data is used on the premise that a predetermined process using the program is executed, the readout priority is higher for the program, and if the readout of the program is delayed, the process waits. Under such circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 93 and at least part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 96, so that the program can be independently read by the MPU 92 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 95. , it is possible to increase the data amount of the light emission data, which tends to be large compared to the program.

Furthermore, instead of storing all of the light emission data in the common ROM 96, a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 93 and the rest is stored in the common ROM 96. Therefore, the data capacity of the common ROM 96 is reduced. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an extreme increase.

<Configuration of register 952 of sound output LSI 95>
Next, see FIG. 28 for the configuration of the register 952 used to instruct the sound output LSI 95 to output sound from the MPU 92 and to transfer the sound data stored in the common ROM 96 from the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92. I will explain while FIG. 28 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of register 952. Referring to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 28, the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 contains areas 9523a to 9523e in which data is set when the MPU 92 issues a sound output instruction to the sound output LSI 95, and data transfer instructions from the MPU 92. buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing and holding data read from the common ROM 96; A flag area 9526 for recognizing the internal state of the output LSI 95 in the MPU 92 is separately provided.

In detail, the above areas 9523a to 9526 will be described as areas in which data setting is performed when a sound output instruction is performed. and a fourth parameter area 9523d. In addition, an area 9523e for sequence data is provided.

Areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters store parameter data necessary for outputting melodies and sound effects, and parameter data necessary for outputting voices. Since a plurality of areas 9523a to 9523d for parameters are provided in this manner, a plurality of sounds can be produced simultaneously. Further, the already explained sequence data is stored in the sequence data area 9523e.

Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 95 has functions for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, four) channels are stored in one parameter area. Also, in a configuration using virtual tracks, a larger number of parameters may be stored in one parameter area.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area in which data is set when the MPU 92 issues a data transfer instruction to the sound output LSI 95 . The transfer instruction area 9525 stores the address data of the light emission data required in the MPU 92 and also stores the data instructing the transfer of the light emission data read from the common ROM 96 to the sound output LSI 95 to the MPU 92 . .

A plurality of external read buffers 9524a to 9524e are provided as areas for temporarily storing data read from the common ROM 96 based on data transfer instructions from the MPU 92. FIG. The light emission data necessary for the MPU 92 are temporarily stored in buffers 9524a to 9524e for external readout, and transferred to the MPU 92 at a predetermined readout timing.

A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for the MPU 92 to recognize the internal state of the sound output LSI 95 . As the flag area 9526, for example, a read completion flag is provided. , "1" is stored in the read completion flag, and the MPU 92 recognizes this fact.

The areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are accessible from the MPU 92. However, the areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are not accessed at the same time. Instead, the accessible target is switched. In other words, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously in the MPU 92 corresponds to the number of the first to eighth signal paths (eight in this embodiment) forming the bus B1 between the MPU 92 and the sound output LSI 95. there is

Specifically, an area 9523a for a first parameter and a buffer 9524a for external reading of 1 are allocated as a first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path forming the bus B1. As a second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path, an area 9523b for the second parameter and a buffer 9524b for external reading of 1 are allocated, and the third area corresponding to the third signal path forming the bus B1. An area 9523c for the third parameter and a buffer 9524c for external reading of 1 are allocated as 9521c, and an area 9523d for the fourth parameter is allocated as the fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path forming the bus B1. and 1 buffers 9524d for external reading. An area 9523e for sequence data and a buffer 9524e for external reading of 1 are allocated as a fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path forming the bus B1.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is allocated as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path forming the bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is allocated as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path forming the bus B1. .

For the register 952, selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided corresponding to the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, respectively. Accessible areas are switchable. This switching is performed through binary switching to the selector area 9527 provided in the register 952 corresponding to the eighth signal path forming the bus B1.

Specifically, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value "0", the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are controlled for sound output by setting the area to be accessed by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to the areas 9523a to 9523e for . That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, the MPU 92 can access the area 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for the sequence data, and the sound output LSI 95 It becomes possible to issue an output instruction for That is, the sound output LSI 95 is in the first interference state with respect to the MPU 92 .

When the information in the selector area 9527 is "1", which is the switching execution value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are set to the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e, and the external reading buffer 9524a is set. ∼9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 92 can access the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and can read the data for which the transfer instruction is given. becomes. That is, the sound output LSI 95 is in a second interference state with respect to the MPU 92 .

On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526 and the selector area 9527 are not switched by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, the MPU 92 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526 and the selector area 9527 in any interference state of the sound output LSI 95. FIG.

The display control device 100 includes a display control board 101 , an MPU 102 , a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 that constitute the MPU 102 , a video display processor (VDP) 105 , a character ROM 106 and a video RAM 107 . Here, the MPU 102 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc., as well as the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are combined into a chip. MPU 102 , VDP 105 , character ROM 106 and video RAM 107 are mounted on display control board 101 .

The MPU 102 controls the VDP 105 based on commands sent from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, the MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and controls the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105 based on this analysis result.

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, is a non-volatile memory that does not require power supply from the outside for holding stored information, and cannot be written. It is a semiconductor device. The program ROM 103 has various areas such as an effect data storage area 1031, an effect data storage area 1032, and various table data storage areas 1033, and the like. These areas are described in detail later.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 103. The work RAM 104 is a volatile RAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold the stored information. memory. The work RAM 104 has various areas such as various counter areas 1041 and various flag storage areas 1042 . These areas are described in detail later. In the first embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 104, but a nonvolatile memory such as MRAM may be used.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the pattern display device 51 . Since the VDP 105 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 reads image data from the character ROM 106 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 102 and stores the image data in the video RAM 107 .

The character ROM 106 pre-stores various image data (image information) including sprite data such as patterns and characters displayed on the pattern display device 51, background data, and moving image data, and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various patterns, a color palette table and the like that are referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image. The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 51 , and the display contents of the pattern display device 51 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107 .

Returning to the description of the sound emission control device 90, the MPU 92 receives the command for variation transmitted from the main control device 60, recognizes that it is necessary to start the production for the game round, and starts the production for the game round. Execute start processing. Further, by receiving an end command transmitted from the main control device 60, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the end processing for the effect for the game round. Further, by receiving various commands for the big win performance transmitted from the main controller 60, it recognizes that the big win performance needs to be started or progressed, and executes the big win performance processing. Also, by receiving a demonstration display command transmitted from main controller 60, it recognizes that it is necessary to start demonstration display, and executes demonstration display processing. Note that the MPU 92 is not limited to receiving commands directly from the main control device 60 for receiving commands from the main control device 60, but may be configured to receive commands relayed by a relay board. .

In the game round effect start processing, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game round and the presence or absence of the ready-to-win display are grasped. a reach display comprehending process, a big win result occurrence comprehending process for comprehending the presence or absence of a big win result, and a jackpot type comprehending process for comprehending the big win type when a big win result occurs are executed. Also, based on the results of the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in this game round. Along with executing the comprehension process, a symbol type comprehension process for determining the type of symbol to be finally displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 in this game round is executed. Then, based on the results of these grasping processes, the display control device 100 outputs a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be displayed in the final stop. Send to

In addition, in the game round effect start process, in addition to the above grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery for the advance notice display is also executed. Then, in the event of winning the announcement display generation, an announcement command including information on the type of announcement display is transmitted to the display control device 100 . In addition, in the game round production start process, based on the processing results of the above processes, light emission data for the game round (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for the game round (sequence data and parameter data are combined). ) are read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 to define the light emission mode of the display lamp device 23 and the output mode of the speaker section 24 .

In the game round effect end processing, the light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 24 in the current game round are ended. In addition, in the game round effect end processing, an end command including information for ending the game round effect is transmitted to the display control device 100 . In the jackpot effect processing, based on the received various commands for the jackpot effect, the effects such as the opening, each round, between rounds, and the ending are grasped, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the grasped results is obtained. command to the display control device 100 . In addition, based on the grasped result, the display data for the big win performance, the sequence data for the big win performance, the parameter data, the sound data, and the light emission data are read out from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, and the display lamp device 23 emits light during the big win performance. It defines the mode and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 24 .

In the demonstration display processing, the mode of demonstration display is grasped based on the received demonstration display command, and a demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 100 . Further, based on the grasped result, light data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) and sound data for demonstration display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read from ROM 93 and common ROM 96, It defines the lighting mode of the display lamp device 23 by the light emitting element driving section 29 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker section 24 during the demonstration display. The processing executed by the MPU 92 based on commands transmitted from the main controller 60 includes processing for controlling light emission of various lamp units 53 to 55 in addition to the above processing.

Further, the MPU 92 recognizes that the operation button 28 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation button 28 based on the operation of the operation portion of the operation button 28, and performs operation corresponding processing. Run. Also, when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding processing is executed. In the operation response process, an operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and an operation generation command including information indicating that the operation button 28 has been operated and information on the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 100 . Further, in the operation response process, an operation cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 100 when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled). In addition to the transmission of the above command, the operation response process defines the light emission mode of the light emitting element drive section 29 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker section 24 so as to correspond to the operation of the operation button 28 .

The display control device 100 determines whether or not to perform an advance notice effect using the first accessory 310 according to the variation pattern displayed on the pattern display device 51 . Then, in the display control device 100, when it is decided to perform the notice effect using the first role product 310, including the operation mode of the first role product 310 decided to be used in the notice effect, That effect is notified from the display control device 100 to the sound emission control device 90 as a role product action start command. The sound emission control device 90 operates the first role product 310 indicated by the role product operation start command in the operation mode indicated by the role product operation start command, so that the solenoid provided in each movable role product and the drive the motor. Details of the display control device 100 will be described later.

For example, the one-shot notification lottery counter is a counter for operating the first accessory 310 and determining whether or not to perform one-shot notification, and at what timing to perform one-shot notification. This one-shot notification lottery counter is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the range of 0-255. The one-shot announcement lottery counter is updated in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds, and the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter is increased by one for each update. Then, when the value of the one-shot notice lottery counter is 255 and the update is performed, the value is returned to zero.

The one-shot notification lottery is performed when a stop type command for display is received from the sound emission control device 90 . Specifically, based on the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display, when the stop pattern becomes a jackpot pattern, whether or not to perform a one-shot notification in the variable effect corresponding to the stop pattern, one shot When the announcement is made, the timing at which the one-shot announcement is made is determined based on the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter.

The one-shot notification flag is a flag indicating that one-shot notification is to be performed. When it is on, it indicates that one-shot notification is to be performed, and when it is off, it indicates that one-shot notification is not to be performed. The one-shot notification flag is initialized to OFF in the initialization process executed after power-on. Then, as a result of the one-shot announcement lottery, when it is decided to make one-shot announcement, the one-shot announcement flag is set to ON. Then, an announcement will be made.

As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, commands are exchanged between the MPU 92 of the sound emission control board 91 and the MPU 102 of the display control board 101 by two-way communication. By exchanging commands through two-way communication, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of various light emitting units, controls the sound output of the speaker unit 24, and controls various movable objects including the first role object 310, which is a movable object. Drive control is executed, and display control of the pattern display device 51 is executed in the MPU 102 . Specific processing contents for executing these various controls will be described below.

<Regarding Timer Interrupt Processing Executed by Sound Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the sound emission control device. The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes timer interrupt processing for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1307 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S1301, the MPU 92 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 92 receives a command from the MPU 62 , it stores the received command in the RAM 94 . Specifically, the RAM 94 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 62 , and the MPU 92 stores the commands in the ring buffer according to the order received from the MPU 62 . The MPU 92 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1302, the MPU 92 executes effect determination processing based on the command received from the MPU 62 of the main controller 60. FIG. In the effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes the effect for the game cycle, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In step S<b>1303 , the MPU 92 executes demonstration display execution processing based on the command received from the MPU 62 . In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 92 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for the start of the demonstration elapses without a new game cycle being started after the game cycle ends. . The effect determination processing in step S1302 and the demonstration display execution processing in step S1303 will be described later in detail.

In step S1304, the MPU 92 executes operation acceptance processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 monitors input as to whether or not the touch sensor 57 operated by the player has been operated in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and when the operation of the touch sensor 57 is confirmed, the corresponding effect is generated. set to do so. In this step, when the player's operation of the touch sensor 57 is detected, a touch sensor operation command is set to notify the display control device 100 that the touch sensor 57 has been operated.

Also, in step S1304, the MPU 92 monitors input as to whether or not the operation button 28 has been operated. When the operation button 28 is operated during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command is set for the display control device 100 . By including information about the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change (for example, "coastal stage", "character stage", "undersea stage", etc., in the rear image change command, the display control device 100 can display the pattern Processing is performed to change the rear image displayed on the display device 51 to an image corresponding to the stage.

Further, when the operation button 28 is operated during the period of effect type selection, the MPU 92 performs processing for changing the effect type after the ending, and sets an effect type change command to the display control device 100 . By including information about the type corresponding to the changed effect, etc. in the effect type change command, the display control device 100 changes the image displayed on the pattern display device 51 to the image corresponding to the selected effect. As the processing is performed, the music (BGM) output from the speaker unit 24 becomes music corresponding to the selected effect.

In addition, the operation button 28 can be used to display the expected value of the big win due to the current fluctuation by pressing the operation button 28 when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, or to press the operation button 28 during the ready-to-win effect. , or the operation button 28 may be changed to a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win performance from among a plurality of ready-to-win performances. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the process of changing the stage during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during the period of high-speed fluctuation, and the process of changing the type of effect after the ending are performed based on the operation of the operation button 28. Alternatively, the process of changing the stage and the process of changing the type of effect after the ending may be performed based on different operation buttons.

In step S1305, the MPU 92, based on the contents of the effect determination process in step S1302 to the operation reception process in step S1304, the light emission control for controlling the light emission of the display lamp device 23 and the first to third reservation lamp units 53 to 55 Execute the process. In step S1306, the MPU 92 executes voice control processing for controlling the speaker unit 24 based on the content of the effect determination processing in step S1302 to the operation reception processing in step S1304.

In step S1307, the MPU 92 drives the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a and the first accessory rotation motor 310a of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, to operate the first accessory 310. Execute drive processing. This role product driving process also includes light emitting/blinking operation of the LED built in the center of the first role product 310 . Details of this character product driving process will be described later. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding effect determination processing executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of effect determination processing. The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for the game cycle, an effect for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1401 to S1414 as shown in FIG.

In step S1401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 have been received. When the MPU 92 determines that each command has not been received in step S1401 (NO), it executes the processing after step S1409. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that each command has been received in step S1401 (YES), in step S1402, based on the content of the type command, the game result is "best result" or "low probability result". It is determined whether or not.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" (YES), in step S1403, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of game result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 92 finally stops and displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. When determining information related to a combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1, 1, 1" or "2, 2, 2") and determining that the game result is a "low probability result", the stop symbol effective line Information relating to a combination of symbols having the same even number (for example, "2.2.2") is determined as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on L. FIG. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1402 that the game result is not the "best result" or the "low-probability result" (NO), in step S1404, based on the content of the type command, the game result is determined to be "out of normal". result”. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1404 that the game result is not the "normal result" (NO), that is, the game result is "special result", "non-explicit small round high probability result", and "explicit small round high probability". If it is determined to be one of the "certain results", in step S1405, common symbol determination processing is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of special symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers (for example, "3-4-1"). It should be noted that this special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "normal result" at step S1404 (YES), at step S1406, the MPU 92 executes symbol determination processing for normal failure. In this normal out-of-symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display will occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. It should be noted that the combination of symbols for the ready-to-win display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols different from the aforementioned combinations of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the effective stop symbol line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of the combination of symbols having the same number, the special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the ready-to-win display by lottery or the like.

After executing any one of steps S1403, S1405, and S1406, the MPU 92 executes a production pattern determination process in step S1407. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to data pre-stored in the ROM 93 . Specifically, the MPU 92 selects an effect continuation time (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and audio control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1408, the MPU 92 generates a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1403, S1405, and S1406, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1407. to the display control device 100 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 stores a data table for executing a game-turning effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92, in the effect data storage area of the program ROM 103. Read from 1031. Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the game turn based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the stop symbol effective line L. to finally stop displaying.

After executing the process of step S1408, or when determining that the variation command and the type command have not been received in step S1401 (NO), the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1409 and subsequent steps. In step S1409, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

When the MPU 92 determines that the opening command has not been received in step S1409 (NO), it executes the processing after step S1413. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the opening command is received in step S1409 (YES), in step S1410, the type of game result is determined based on the content of the opening command.

In step S1411, the MPU 92 executes determination processing of the effect for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1410. In the opening/closing execution mode effect determination process, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1410 that the game result is the "special loss result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is determined. Select performance A.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the "best result", the MPU 92 selects the effect C as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. The duration of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short period of time in the open/close execution mode. Also, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is executed 15 times in the long time mode in the open/close execution mode.

Further, in step S1411, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker section 24 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S<b>1412 , the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 an opening/closing execution mode command including information relating to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S<b>1411 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out from the program ROM 103 a data table for executing the opening/closing execution mode effect on the pattern display device 51 based on the opening/closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the pattern display device 51 executes an effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 .

After the MPU 92 executes the process of step S1412, or when it determines that the opening command is not received in step S1409 (NO), in step S1413, an effect to make the player select the mode effect after the end of the jackpot game. It is determined whether or not to generate the type selection process, and the effect type selection process is executed according to the determination result. This effect type selection process will be described later in detail.

In step S1414, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 92 executes, for example, effect transition processing. In the effect transition process, the MPU 92 executes the game mode transition process from the jackpot game to the RUSH mode based on the effects MA to MC selected by the player. Also, in step S1414, the MPU 92 executes processing for advancing the effect for the opening/closing execution mode and the effect after the opening/closing execution mode ends, based on the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the effect determination process.

<Regarding the relationship between game results and game status>
The relationship between game results and game states based on the execution of various processes will be described below. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results and game states. Specifically, FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game results excluding the "normal failure result" and the game states, etc., in which the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game states, etc. are arranged in the row direction. The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. It has distribution results of "few rounds high probability result", "best result", and "low probability result".

As shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 31, the "special loss result" is the game result selected when the "big win" is not won in the win/loss lottery (symbol x in the drawing). Also, the sorting result is the game result selected when "big hit" is won in the winning lottery (symbol ◯ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game results other than the "normal result" and the game state will be described. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows. And the contents of the game state, etc. are arbitrary.

In the case of the "special failure result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the opening/closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 381 is executed twice in a short period of time. Also, in the "special losing result", it does not shift to the lottery mode. In the "unspecified small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. In addition, in the "non-explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In this way, the "special loss result" and the "non-explicit small round high probability result" are different in the type of opening and closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is performed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

In addition, in the "special failure result" and "non-explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect A. This production A includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is structured as a series of performances. Also, the support mode does not shift in the "special outlier result" and the "implicit few rounds high probability result". In addition, the symbol display device 51 does not display, on the display screen G, an image indicating that the high-probability mode is set in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is the "special failure result" or the "non-explicit small round high probability result" by checking the stop result or the effect A. In other words, even when the distribution lottery results in the "unexplained small round high probability result" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 51 does not perform the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Disguise as if the mode has not changed. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction as to whether or not the win/fail lottery mode has shifted to the high-probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high probability result", the opening and closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with two times as the upper limit number of times, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 381 is executed twice in a short time mode. be. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect B. This production B includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is configured. In addition, in the "explicit small number of rounds high probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game cycle after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 51 displays an image on the display screen G clearly indicating the high probability mode. Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big winning hole 381 is performed 15 times in a long time mode. times. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning/failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the open/close execution mode The production of will be production C. This production C includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is configured.

In addition, in the "low-probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the win-or-fail lottery mode shifts to the low-probability mode. Become. Additionally, for "Most Favorable Outcome" and "Less Probable Outcome", the support mode transitions to a high frequency support mode. This production D includes an opening production for the opening/closing execution mode, a production for opening and closing the variable winning device, and an ending production for the opening/closing execution mode. It is configured.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance time of each opening performance is the same. Also, in the first embodiment, the effect time of each ending effect is the same. However, the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation time of the ending presentation are arbitrary, and the presentation time of the opening presentation and the presentation of the ending presentation may be different times. Also, the effect time may be set for each game result, that is, for each opening effect, or only part of the opening effect may be different for the effect time. Further, the performance time may be set for each game result, that is, for each ending performance, or only part of the ending performance may be different.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process in FIG. 30, as described above. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display, and determines the content of the advance notice display (including the presence or absence of the notice and the result) and the timing of the occurrence of the notice display. set. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an operation notice part, which will be described later, to prompt the player to place his or her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, in other words, executes a notice display. (hereinafter also referred to as notification presence notice display), and does not suggest to the player that the operation notice part to be described later is executed and the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. It has a form, in other words, a form in which the execution of the advance notice display is not notified (hereinafter also referred to as "no notice display").

In the following description, of the advance notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the advance notice displays related to the touch sensor 57 will be explained, and explanations of other advance notice displays will be omitted. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery to determine whether to generate another advance notice display. Only a lottery may be executed as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to 57 .

In step S1501, the MPU 92 executes a notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display.
The MPU 92 uses the value of the advance notice display lottery counter to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display. Note that the notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 .

The advance notice display lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a buffer for notice display lottery counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
The MPU 92 executes a lottery (announcement display lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement display based on the value of the announcement display lottery counter stored in the announcement display lottery counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the advance notice display lottery counter stored in the advance notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice display table to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display. conduct a lottery. The advance notice display table is a table storing values of random numbers relating to the generation of advance notice display, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, the advance notice display table is a table that is referred to when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the advance notice based on the value of the advance notice display lottery counter. The notice display table assigns a plurality of sorting results of "result without notice", "result with notice with notice", and "result with notice without notice". For example, the notice display table assigns "0 to 9" (probability 1/2) among the values "0 to 19" of the notice display lottery counter to "no notice result", and "10 to 14" (probability 1 /4) are sorted into "results with notice with notice", and "15 to 19" (probability 1/4) are sorted into "results with no notice".

In step S1502, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the announcement display lottery is won in step S1501. When the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 not to generate an advance notice display (NO), it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S1503.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1502 to generate an advance notice display (YES), in step S1503, an operation advance notice part, which will be described later, is executed to display the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is determined whether or not to suggest to the player to hold his/her hand over the position, in other words, whether or not to notify the execution of the advance notice display. When the MPU 92 determines to perform notification in step S1503 (YES), the MPU 92 executes notification presence notice display setting processing in step S1504. In this notice display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of the notice (with notice), the result of the notice display, and the timing for generating the notice display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven.
Further, the MPU 92 sets the display screen G to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is "winning the jackpot", and sets the MPU 92 to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is not "winning the jackpot". Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

Further, in step S1504, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing of generating the notice display as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of the notification presence notice display generation in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. . Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from when the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the wait time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is 1 sec. Note that the standby time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the notification is not performed in step S1503 (NO), the MPU 92 executes a no-notification advance notice display setting process in step S1505. In this no-announcement advance notice display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of notice (no notice), the result of the notice display, and the timing for generating the notice display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven. Further, the MPU 92 may determine the result of the advance notice display by setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles based on information relating to the result of success or failure.

Further, in step S1505, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing for generating the advance notice display as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of the notice non-prediction display generation timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. . Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time until the timing TM1 after the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the standby time for the timing of occurrence of the non-notification display is 1 sec. In addition, the waiting time for the occurrence timing of the no-announcement advance notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win", and the win/fail result is not a "jackpot win". In this case, the result of the advance notice display is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is "winning the jackpot", it increases the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result is "winning the jackpot". If it is determined that it is not, the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven may be reduced, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.
In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 increases the probability of displaying a school of fish and bubbles on the display screen G, and determines that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot". In this case, the probability of setting to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G may be reduced, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.

In step S1506, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the notice display should be generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the advance notice display, the MPU 92 substitutes 0 for the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby clearing the notice winning flag.

In the above description, when it is determined that the notice display is to be generated (YES) in step S1502, the player is suggested to hold his or her hand over the central position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in step S1503. In other words, it is determined by a distribution lottery whether or not to notify that the advance notice display will be performed. In other words, it is determined by a sorting lottery whether the notice given at the same timing is to be notified or not.
However, there is an advance notice display of "notice present" that suggests to the player to hold the hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and a "not to suggest to the player to hold the hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51". The advance notice display of "no notification" may be performed independently of each other.
In this case, a lottery is made as to whether or not to make an advance notice of "notice present" suggesting to the player that he/she should place his/her hand over the display screen G, and the player is suggested to place his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. A lottery will be independently conducted to determine whether or not to give notice of "not informed",
If the result of the lottery is to display a notice, for the notice display of "no notice", the notice display of "no notice" is generated at the timing determined for each fluctuation pattern (variation time), and the notice of "no notice" As for the display, the timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) to be generated may be determined by lottery using a counter and a distribution table.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an operation notice part of the notice display. The advance notice display of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the player should place his/her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in the operation notice part, and informs the player of the result of the notice display in the notice result notification part. notify. The advance notice display of this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the operation notice part is executed only in the case of the notice display with notice, and is not executed in the case of the notice display without notice.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the advance notice display includes an image GB1A indicating that a hand is held over the central position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 and a timer indicating the duration of the operation notice part, as shown in FIG. A gauge GB2A is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below this image GB1A. Then, the notice display shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his/her hand over the touch sensor 57. In the notice result notification part, if the big win is won, the display is changed to FIG. 33(b). As shown, by rotating the first role 310 clockwise (right) in the game area 31R near the position where the first role 310 is driven and lowered to the maximum point position, the player can A notice effect (one-shot notification chance effect) is performed to make the rotating first accessory 310 visible and foretell that a big win will be achieved in the variable effect. At this time, an LED (not shown) built in the vicinity of the center of rotation of the first role object 310 is made to emit light in conjunction with the motion of the first role object 310, thereby emphasizing the advance notice effect. In addition, the display on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 is controlled in accordance with the action of the first role object 310 so that the brightness around the first role object 310 is increased. As a result, the advance notice effect by the first accessory 310 is further emphasized.

In addition, in the advance notice display, if the jackpot is not won in the advance notice result notification part, as shown in FIG. inform the person.

In this embodiment, the advance notice display notifies the player of the result of the notice display depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the notice result notification part. In the notification part, by setting a school of fish and bubbles to be displayed on the display screen G when a big win is won, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display, and when the big win is not won. Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the timing of generating the advance notice display.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34, the notice display occurs at various timings from the start to the end of the game cycle. For example, the notification presence notice display is performed at a timing TM1 from when the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern to when the normal ready-to-win display (normal reach) is generated, or when the pattern display device 51 generates the ready-to-win display. After that, the timing TM2 until the reach display (super reach) with a display duration longer than the normal reach display is generated, and the reach display (special reach) with a display duration longer than the super reach display is generated. It occurs at various timings such as timing TM3 and timing TM4 until the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the special reach is generated in the pattern display device 51.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the present embodiment, the non-notification advance notice display is a reach display (super Although it occurs at the timing TM2 until the ready-to-win is generated, it may be generated at various timings from the start to the end of the game cycle like the advance notice display without notification. Further, in the present embodiment, the acceptance time of the no-notification advance notice display (the time defined by a timer counter TB described later) is longer than the notice-with-prediction display (for example, 10 seconds).

In this embodiment, only the case where the advance notice display occurs at the timing TM1 will be described, and the explanation of the cases where the advance notice display will occur at other timings will be omitted.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the MPU 92 generates the advance notice display only once at any one of the timings TM1 to TM4. good.

<Regarding the process of executing the announcement display on the sound emission side executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for executing announcement display on the sound emitting side.
The MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 executes the audio emission side advance notice display execution process in order to execute the advance notice display determined in the production pattern decision process. In this audio emission side advance notice display execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S1601, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines not to generate the notice display in step S1601 (NO), it ends the sound emitting side notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S1602.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1601 that the advance notice display is to be generated (YES), in step S1602 it judges whether or not the advance notice display is being generated.
Note that the MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is occurring by referring to the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . The MPU 92 assigns 1 to an area indicative of the notice display flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 to set the notice display flag to notify the result of the notice display. By substituting 0 in an area indicating the flag for the occurrence of the notice display provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag for the notice display occurrence is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 that the advance notice is being displayed (YES), it executes the processing from step S1605.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1602 that the advance notice display is not being generated (NO), in step S1603, the timing for generating the advance notice display set in step S1504 or step S1505 of FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not timing TM1 has been reached.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the timing counter TMB set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S1504 or step S1505 in FIG. , when it is determined that the value of the timing counter TMB is not equal to or less than "0", it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.
In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the waiting time (1 sec in this embodiment) for the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice has passed after the symbol display device 51 starts the variable display of the symbols, the MPU 92 returns to the timing TM1. If it is determined that the timing has reached and the standby time for the timing for generating the advance notice display has not passed, then it is determined that the timing TM1 has not reached.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1603 that the timing TM1 for generating the advance notice display set in step S1504 or step S1505 of FIG. The audio emission side notice display execution processing is ended. On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the advance notice display set in step S1504 or S1505 of FIG. . Details of the advance notice display generating process in step S1604 will be described later.

After executing the advance notice display generating process in step S1604, or when it is determined that the advance notice display is being generated in step S1602 (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing after step S1605.
In step S1605, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 5 seconds, which is the standby time for the touch sensor, has elapsed after generating the advance notice display. Here, the standby time for the touch sensor may be different between the notice display with notice and the notice display without notice. It is preferable that the time is longer than that of the notification presence notice display, for example, about 10 seconds.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1605 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less (NO), it executes the processing from step S1606.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less (YES), it executes the processing from step S1609.

First, the processing (processing after step S1606) when it is determined in step S1605 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 is not "0" or less will be described.
In step S<b>1606 , the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player has held his or her hand over the touch sensor 57 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S1606 that the player does not hold his or her hand over the touch sensor 57 (NO), the MPU 92 terminates the audio emission side notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S1607. .
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1606 that the player has placed his/her hand over the touch sensor 57 (YES), in step S1607, the MPU 92 executes notice result notification processing. In this notice result notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player of the result of the notice display generated in step S1604. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the first accessory 310, display control on the display screen G, and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player of the result of the advance notice display. In addition, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a notice result notification command for recognizing that the notice result notification process has been executed.
In addition, the display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . This processing will be described later in detail.

In step S<b>1608 , the MPU 92 clears the advance notice display occurrence flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Specifically, the MPU 92 assigns 0 to an area indicating the flag for the display of advance notice provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby clearing the flag for the display of the advance notice of occurrence. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the sound emitting side notice display execution process.

Next, processing (processing after step S1609) when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less in step S1605 will be described.
In step S1609, the MPU 92 executes a notice failure notification process. In this notice failure notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified. After that, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1608 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 92 performs light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified. do. Further, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a failure notice notification command for recognizing that the failure notice notification process has been executed.
In addition, the display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 . This processing will be described later in detail.

In the above description, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1605 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less (YES), in step S1609, the MPU 92 Although the notice failure notification process for notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified is being executed, the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 is "0". '' (YES), the MPU 92 may execute the process of step S1608 without notifying the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the advance notice display generating process.
In the notice display generating process, the MPU 92 generates the notice display based on the notice winning flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and sets the aforementioned notice display occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. - 特許庁Note that the notice winning flag also includes information on whether or not there is an announcement.

In step S<b>1701 , the MPU 92 executes the notice display generating process based on the notice winning flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
In the notice display generating process, the MPU 92, for example, executes driving of the first accessory 310, executes light emission control of the display lamp device 23, and executes sound control of the speaker section 24. FIG.

In step S<b>1702 , the MPU 92 sets the above-described advance notice display occurrence flag in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
Also, in step S1702, the MPU 92 sets "1000" as a waiting time (waiting period) for the touch sensor in a timer counter TB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. FIG. The wait time for the touch sensor defines the continuation time (duration) of the operation announcement part from when the announcement display is generated until the operation announcement part ends. The value set in the timer counter TB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the waiting time for the touch sensor is 5 sec. Note that the standby time for the touch sensor is not limited to this and is arbitrary. Further, in the present embodiment, the standby time for the touch sensor is set to be the same for the display with advance notice and the display without advance notice, but it may be different between the display with advance notice and the display without notice. . In this case, since touch on the screen is not notified in the non-noticeable advance notice display, the standby time for the touch sensor is preferably longer than in the with-notice advance notice display, and is preferably about 10 seconds, for example.

Furthermore, in step S1702, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a notice display generation command for recognizing that the notice display generation processing has been executed. The advance notice display generation command includes information related to the contents and results of the advance notice display generated by this advance notice display generation processing. Also, the advance notice display generation command includes information related to the timer counter TB.
Note that the display control device 100 executes predetermined processing based on the advance notice display generation command transmitted from the MPU 92 . This processing will be described later in detail.

<Regarding display-side advance notice display execution processing executed by display control device 100>
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display-side advance notice display execution processing.
The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes display-side notice display execution processing in order to execute the notice display determined by the effect pattern decision processing of the sound emission control device 90 . In this display-side preview display execution process, the MPU 102 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes steps S1801 to S1808, as shown in FIG.

In step S<b>1801 , the MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice display generation command transmitted from the MPU 92 has been received.
When the MPU 102 determines in step S1801 that the advance notice display generation command has not been received (NO), it executes the processing from step S1803.
On the other hand, if the MPU 102 determines in step S1801 that it has received an advance notice display generation command (YES), in step S1802 it executes advance notice display generation processing.

In this notice display generating process, the MPU 102 specifies the content and result of the notice display based on the content of the notice display generation command, and performs A waiting time (waiting period) for the touch sensor is set in the timer counter TB provided in the various counter areas 1041 of the work RAM 104 .

Also, the MPU 102 determines whether or not to generate a notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice winning flag stored in the flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104 in the notice display generating process of step S1802. When the MPU 102 determines to generate the advance notice display (YES), the MPU 102 causes the advance notice display to be generated, and sets 1 to the area indicating the advance notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104 . By substituting, the advance notice display flag is set.
The MPU 102 determines whether or not the advance notice display is occurring by referring to the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104 . When the MPU 102 notifies the result of the advance notice display, the notice display flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104 .

Next, the MPU 102 causes the symbol display device 51 to generate an advance notice display and to make the player operate the touch sensor 57, in other words, to make the player hold his or her hand over the symbol display device. A data table for performing is read out from the various data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 103 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. As a result, the symbol display device 51 generates an advance notice display or suggests to the player to operate the touch sensor 57 .

Specifically, when the MPU 102 generates an advance notice display of the central operation position (when the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104), the operation advance notice part performs the operation advance notice part shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33(b), the player is suggested to place his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the first accessory 310 is driven as shown in FIG. Depending on whether or not, the result of the advance notice display is notified to the player.

After executing the advance notice display generation process in step S1802, or if it is determined in step S1801 that the advance notice display generation command has not been received (NO), the MPU 102 executes the processing from step S1803.

In step S1803, the MPU 102 determines whether or not an advance notice display is occurring. Here, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the warning display is occurring by referring to the area indicating the warning display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104 .

If the MPU 102 determines in step S1803 that the advance notice display is not occurring (NO), it ends the display side advance notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S1804.
On the other hand, if the MPU 102 determines in step S1803 that the advance notice display is occurring (YES), in step S1804 it judges whether or not the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 has been received. do.

If the MPU 102 determines in step S1804 that it has received the failure notice notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 (YES), it executes failure notice notification processing in step S1805. In this notice failure notification process, the MPU 102 displays an effect for informing the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified based on the content of the notice failure notice command transmitted from the MPU 92. A data table to be executed by the device 51 is read from the various data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 103 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified.

In step S1806, the MPU 102 clears various flags set in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 102 assigns 0 to an area indicating each operation position flag and the advance notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage area 1042 of the work RAM 104, thereby clearing the various flags. After that, the MPU 102 terminates the display-side advance notice display execution process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 102 determines in step S1804 that the notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 has not been received (NO), in step S1807, the notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 is transmitted. Determine whether or not it is received.

When the MPU 102 determines in step S1807 that the notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 has not been received (NO), it ends the display side notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S1808. do.
On the other hand, if the MPU 102 determines in step S1807 that it has received the notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 (YES), it executes notice result notification processing in step S1808.

In the notice result notification process, the MPU 102, based on the content of the notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, uses a data table for executing an effect for notifying the player of the result of the notice display on the symbol display device 51. is read from the various data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 103 . Then, the MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table each time a predetermined image update timing (for example, every 20 msec) comes. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 notifies the player of the result of the advance notice display. After that, the MPU 102 executes the processes after step S1806 described above.

<Display Side Accessory Product Drive Processing>
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of display-side accessory driving processing.
As described above, in the role product driving process, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 determines whether or not to perform the advance notice effect using the first role product 310 according to the variation pattern displayed on the pattern display device 51 . Then, in the display control device 100, when it is decided to perform the notice effect using the first role product 310, including the operation mode of the first role product 310 decided to be used in the notice effect, That effect is notified from the display control device 100 to the sound emission control device 90 as a role product action start command. In the following description, the driving mode of the first role product 310 will be described by taking the driving mode of the first role product 310 in one-shot announcement as an example.

In step S1901, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the command for variation and the type command transmitted from the main controller 60 have been received. When the MPU 102 determines that each command has not been received in step S1901 (NO), it ends the execution of the display side role product driving process.
Also, if the variation command and the type command have been received in step S1901 (YES), the MPU 102 determines in step S1902 whether or not the type command received in step S1901 is a big hit or a special loss result. .
If it is not a big hit or a special loss result in step S1902 (NO), the MPU 102 terminates execution of the display side role product driving process.
Also, if the result is a big hit or a special loss in step S1902 (YES), in step S1903, the MPU 102 draws a lottery as to whether or not to make a one-shot announcement. In step S1903, the MPU 102 determines whether or not to make a one-shot announcement based on the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter and, if so, at what timing.

The one-shot announcement lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The one-shot announcement lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a one-shot announcement lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the work RAM 104 .
Based on the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter stored in the one-shot announcement lottery counter buffer, the MPU 102 decides whether to make a one-shot announcement, and at what timing to drive the first accessory 310 to make the one-shot announcement. , and the mode of operation thereof are selected by lottery. More specifically, the MPU 102 acquires the value of the one-shot announcement lottery counter stored in the one-shot announcement lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the one-shot announcement lottery table to determine the one-shot announcement. At what timing the first accessory 310 is driven to make a one-shot announcement, and its operation mode (driving pattern) are selected by lottery. Lottery and determination of the drive pattern of the first role product 310 using this one-shot notification propriety table is also referred to as "first role product drive pattern determination process".
The one-shot notification success/failure table is a table that stores random number values related to the one-shot notification lottery, and is stored in the various table data storage area 1033 of the program ROM 103 .

In step S1904, the MPU 102 determines whether or not the one-shot announcement has been won. If the one-shot announcement is not won in step S1904 (NO), the MPU 102 terminates execution of the display-side auditor product driving process.
On the other hand, when the one-shot announcement is won in step S1904 (YES), the MPU 102 transmits a role product operation start command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S1905. This role product action start command includes the timing for making a one-shot announcement and the operation mode of the first role product 310, and the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, according to the information included in the role product action start command, It is configured to be able to recognize the timing of the one-shot announcement and the operation mode of the first role product 310 . When the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 receives the character product operation start command, it sets the character product operation start flag in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 .

<Applicability table for one-shot announcement>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a one-shot announcement right/wrong table.
The MPU 62 of the main controller 60 makes a one-shot announcement by comparing the one-shot announcement lottery counter value stored in the one-shot announcement lottery counter buffer with the one-shot announcement success/failure table shown in FIG. If so, at what timing the first accessory 310 is driven to make a one-shot announcement, and the operation mode is selected by lottery.

The success/failure table for one-shot announcement contains the result of the lottery for occurrence of one-shot announcement of "lost" and "winning" (win-fail result), and in the case of "winning", at what timing the one-shot announcement is generated. Then, it has the timing to drive the first role product 310 and its operation mode. The value and number of random numbers stored in the one-shot announcement success/failure table are arbitrary, and the probability of winning the one-shot announcement is arbitrary.

<Regarding the sound emission side character product driving execution process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the voice emitting side role product driving execution process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the sound emission side role product driving execution process in order to drive the first role product 310 determined in the role product driving process. In this sound emission side role product driving execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first role product 310 by referring to the area indicating the role product operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S2001 that the value of the role product operation start flag is 0 and that the first role product 310 is not to be driven (NO), sound emission is performed without executing the processing after step S2002. End the side role product driving execution process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2001 that the value of the role product operation start flag is 1 and that the first role product 310 is to be driven (YES), in step S2002, the announcement display is being generated. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is occurring by referring to an area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2002 that the advance notice display is occurring (YES), it ends the sound emitting side accessory driving execution process without executing the processes after step S2003.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2002 that the advance notice display is not occurring in step S2002 (NO), in step S2003, it checks whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. judge.
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first role product is being driven by referring to the area indicating the flag during the role product driving provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . When driving the first role product 310, the MPU 92 sets the role product driving flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the role product driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and the first role product 310 is set. After driving the object 310, by substituting 0 in the area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during driving of the role product is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines that the first role product is being driven in step S2003 (YES), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution processing without executing the processing after step S2004.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2003 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), in step S2004 it determines whether or not it is time to drive the first accessory 310. . Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC set in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0 based on the information on the timing of occurrence of the one-shot announcement included in the role product action start command. do. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2004 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, step Without executing the processing after S2005, the voice emitting side character product driving execution processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2004 that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is set to 0. If so, in step S2005, a character product driving execution process is executed. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first role product vertical movement motor 310a and the first role product rotation motor 310a based on the operation pattern based on the operation mode of the first role product 310 determined in the process of FIG. Then, the driving of the first accessory 310 is executed.

In step S2006, after the driving of the first role product 310 is completed, the role product operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 in the area indicating the role product operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the accessory driving execution process.
In step S2101 of the accessory driving execution process, the MPU 92 reads from the data table of the RAM 94 an operation pattern determined by lottery. In step S2102, the MPU 92 determines whether the first accessory 310 is at the origin position, in other words, whether the origin detection sensor 311 is ON.

If the origin detection sensor 311 is not ON in step S2102 (NO), the MPU 92 executes origin return processing in step S2103. In this origin return process, the MPU 92 controls the driver of the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a to rotate the drive gear 310b until the origin detection sensor 311 is turned ON, thereby raising the first accessory 310. .

In step S2102, if the first accessory 310 is at the origin position (YES), or if the origin return is completed in step S2103, the MPU 92 drives the first accessory based on the motion pattern in step S2104. Specifically, in step S2104, the MPU 92 controls the first accessory vertical movement motor 310a, the first accessory rotation motor, and the driver that drives the LEDs built in the first accessory 310. The first role product 310 is operated based on the drive pattern determined by the display-side role product driving process of 38 .

In step S2105, the MPU 92 clears the accessory driving flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 clears the flag during driving of the role product by substituting 0 in an area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . After that, the MPU 92 terminates the character product driving execution process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in step S2002 of FIG. 40, it is determined whether or not the advance notice display is occurring. The detection of the touch sensor 57 can be preferably performed by terminating the sound emission side character product driving execution process without executing the process after step S2003. In other words, it is possible to prevent the touch sensor 57 from detecting the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and performing control unintended by the player.
Normally, since the operating position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. A role object 310 is arranged. For this reason, the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first role product 310 by operating the first role product 310 while accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57, even though the player is not operating it. However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is no such problem and the player can enjoy the game. Therefore, the player's satisfaction can be improved.

<Game flow>
FIG. 42 is a diagram explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. When starting a game with the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the first mode M1. The "first mode" (normal mode) is a game state in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. In the first mode M1, by entering the game ball into the first starting port 36, the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

In the first mode M1, if the "unexplicit small round high probability result" is won, the game shifts to the second mode M2 (takeoff mode). The "second mode" is a game state in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and there is no support mode. The second mode M2 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode continues until the next big win.

Also, in the first mode M1, if the "explicit small round high probability result" is won, the game shifts to the third mode M3 (flight mode). The "third mode" is a mode in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of times played. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big win.

Also, in the first mode M1, if the "best result" is won, the game shifts to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). The "fourth mode" is a mode in which the lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a game state with no limit on the number of times played. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next big win is guaranteed, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big win. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in the first embodiment) with different effects as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In the first embodiment, an effect type selection effect for selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed during the effect of the opening and closing execution mode of "best result", more specifically during the round game. An image for selecting the effect of mode M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 28 and selects a desired effect from among the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 which shifts after the game of "best result" is selected. It will be a directed performance. In the fourth mode M4, since the next big win is guaranteed, the fourth mode M4 continues until the next big win.

Also, in the first mode M1, if the "low-probability result" is won, the game shifts to the fifth mode M5 (revenge mode). The "fifth mode" is a game state mode in which the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode with a limit of 100 times. In the fifth mode M5, the next big win is not promised, and if the big win is won again by the support mode limit of 100 times, the revenge will be successful, but the support mode will reach the limit of 100 times. When the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high-frequency support ends, and the success/fail lottery mode shifts to a low-probability mode and a first mode M1 having no support mode.

Note that the game flow shown in FIG. 42 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. For example, in the first embodiment, mode transition is not performed for the special loss result (small hit result), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a "special loss result (small hit result)". , "Special Loss Result" does not trigger the shift to the lottery mode or the support mode, but it triggers the shift to the opening/closing execution mode. For this reason, it may be configured such that the mode is shifted when the "special loss result" is won.

<Example of production image>
Next, an effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with an example. When an internal lottery for a big win is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60, and the variation display is performed on the main display section 46. As described above, the main display section 46 The display area of is set to be extremely small, making it difficult for a player who pays attention to various effects executed by the pattern display device 51 to easily recognize each piece of information in the lighting state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. Note that illustration of the background image is omitted in FIG.

<Before change display>
Figure 43 (A): Before the special figure 1 starts to change (not in the demonstration stage), the display screen G has a large row of decorative figures, which are the effect symbols. At this time, according to the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decoration figures of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 are also stopped on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Start of changing display effect>
FIG. 43(B): Synchronizing with the start of fluctuation of special figure 1, the fluctuation display effect is started by scroll fluctuation of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 on the display screen of the display screen G. That is, in synchronism with the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2, the decoration figures of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled (flowing) in the vertical direction within the display screen of the display screen G Variable display production is started. In FIG. 43, the variable display of each symbol display row Z1 to Z3 is indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, individual production patterns are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the production pattern is displayed in a state that is easy to see on the display screen. be done.

The background image in this case expresses, for example, scenery such as the town, sea, and mountains. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the presentation is, for example, the "first mode". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "first mode" is, as described above, a game state (normal mode) in which the lottery mode is the low-probability mode and there is no support mode. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with various other performance modes, and a different background image is prepared for each performance mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the difference between the internal "win-win lottery mode" and "support mode". Although not particularly shown in FIG. 43, after this, for example, an image of a specific character, item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen to perform an announcement effect.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z1>
FIG. 43(C): After a predetermined time (for example, about half of the variable time) has elapsed, the symbol display row Z1 first stops variable display. In this example, it is shown that a decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped on the stop symbol valid line L.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z3>
FIG. 43(D): After the symbol display row Z1, the symbol display row Z3 stops changing display. In this example, it is shown that a decorative figure representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol valid line L. At this point, it has already been determined that the reach state will not occur, so it is almost clear visually that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. It should be noted that reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded here. The "sliding pattern" means that, for example, after a decorative figure representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol display row slides by one symbol and a decorative figure representing the number "8" is displayed in a stopped manner. By doing so, it develops into a reach. Alternatively, after the decorative figure representing the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative figure slides in the opposite direction by one symbol and the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed, thereby increasing the reach. Evolving patterns are also possible. In addition, after a performance symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily stopped and displayed, if a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol display row Z3 is restarted, the number " It is also possible to think of a pattern in which a decorative figure representing "8" is displayed in a stationary manner and develops into a reach.

<Stop display effect>
Figure 43 (E): Synchronizing with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the last symbol display row Z2 stops the variable display. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the special figure 1 is stop-displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the non-winning (losing) combination is also stop-displayed for the decorative figure. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 43(E), it indicates that a decoration figure representing the number "1" is stopped on the stop symbol valid line L. In this case, the combination of the decoration figures is "8 1".・Since it is a deviation of 3", it is expressed in the production that it corresponds to a normal "loss" in this change.

An example of the variation display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) performed using a decorative figure for each variation has been described above with reference to FIG. Through the performance displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, the player is given a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the big win will be won, and finally the result of the internal lottery is clearly taught in the performance. can be done.

<Production example of variable display>
44 and 45, in the first mode M1 (game state where the lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode), a case where a jackpot is won in the lottery and is distributed to the "best result" ( FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of an effect C executed when a so-called first hit occurs. It should be noted that in the following description, the description of matters common to the above-described production example will be omitted. 44 and 45, illustration of the background image is omitted.

<Before starting the variable display effect>
FIG. 44(A): On the display screen G, the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed large. In each of the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3, a combination of decorative figures representing the numbers "9, 1, 3" is displayed.

<Start of changing display effect>
FIG. 44(B): When the symbol display rows Z1 to Z3 scroll and fluctuate on the display screen G, a variable display effect is started.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z1>
FIG. 44(C): The symbol display row Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In FIG. 44(C), a decorative figure representing the number "1" is displayed still.

<Stop display of symbol display row Z3>
FIG. 44(D): The symbol display row Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. FIG. In FIG. 44(D), a decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display effect>
Figure 44 (E): In synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the symbol display row Z2 is stopped and displayed. Normally, if the special symbols are stopped and displayed as lost symbols, the decorative symbols, which are performance symbols displayed on the display screen G, are similarly stopped and displayed in a lost manner. However, in FIG. 44(E), the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of "Most Advantageous Result", and in the symbol display row Z2, a decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Production in open/close execution mode>
When the combination of decoration figures for the big win is stop-displayed on the display screen G, the opening/closing execution mode is entered after that, and the performance of the opening/closing execution mode is executed on the display screen G according to the result of lottery for the big win. Specifically, the effect C is executed as the effect of the opening/closing execution mode of the "best result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

Fig. 45(F): When the opening/closing execution mode is entered, an opening effect is executed. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is greatly changed, and a character image G1 such as "BONUS!" be notified. It should be noted that if the player can be notified of the winning of the jackpot, the notification may be made in another manner (for example, by outputting sound).

FIG. 45(G): Next, in order to inform the player that the game will be played with the right hand, a character image G2 reading, for example, "Right hand!" be. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed to the right of the character image G3 of "Right shot!" Also, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, the speaker unit 24 outputs, for example, a voice saying "Right-handed!" In the pachinko machine 10, the variable winning device 38 is provided on the right side of the game board 31 as shown in FIG. The amount of rotation operation is maximized, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 31R is shifted from the side where the exit part of the guide rail 34 is formed to the side on the opposite side (so-called right hitting) Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(G), the player is informed that a right-handed game will be played. It should be noted that the rightward arrow and the character image G3 of "Right shot!" may be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. As a result, even a player who cannot understand Japanese can intuitively understand that a right-handed game is to be played. In addition, in the following description, the right hitting navigation which is a suggestion of the right hitting game in the jackpot game state is also called the right hitting navigation for the jackpot game.

FIG. 45(H): Following the opening effect, the effect of opening and closing the variable winning device is executed. In this production, for example, a battle production is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of informing the player that the character on the player side and the enemy character will battle and that the game will be shifted to the high-probability mode after the jackpot game by winning the battle. In addition, on the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of characters of "Right-handed" and a right-pointing arrow "→" are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is continued. Also, an effect may be performed in which the characters "Right shot" and the rightward arrow "→" are displayed so as to flow from the left end of the display screen G to the right end.

FIG. 45(I): During the effect of opening and closing the variable prize winning device, the effect type that allows the player to select the effect mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode explained in step S1413 of FIG. A selection effect is executed. In this effect type selection effect, the player depresses the left direction button 282 and/or the right direction button 283 of the operation buttons 28, and selects one of the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G and selects the desired effect. Select an image that shows the type of effect. In the example shown in FIG. 45(I), the image GA is an image representing the effect MA, the image GB is an image representing the effect MB, and the image GC is an image representing the effect MC. When the player presses the operation button 28 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other non-selected images, indicating that the image has been selected. is configured so that After the player selects a desired effect, when the player presses the decision button 281 of the operation buttons 28, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Note that in the first embodiment, if the player does not select and finalize the desired effect within a predetermined time, specifically, by the 15th round, which is the final round, the effect (first In one embodiment, the effect MA) is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select/confirm the effect mode within the predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically confirmed as the effect in the fourth mode M4 after the elapse of the predetermined time. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 45, the effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically confirmed as the effect in the fourth mode M4. be.

In the example shown in FIG. 45(I), the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images. / Alternatively, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may move to the center of the display screen G when the right direction button 283 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 45(J), the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, so the image GB is arranged in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 45(J), in order to clearly show the selected image to the player, the currently selected image GB is placed in the center of the display screen G, and other selected images are displayed. The image GB is displayed on the topmost surface by overlapping (superimposed) on the images GA and GC that do not exist, and clearly indicates that the image GB is selected. It should be noted that the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other non-selected images GA and GC in order to more clearly show the selected image to the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 45(J), the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed in a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 indicating the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed below the image GB, and the remaining time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed in red. red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 45(J)) decreases, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion) decreases with the passage of time. It may be configured to move to the left when facing the display screen G. FIG. In addition, the red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 45(J)) of the gauge image G4 increases with the lapse of time. may move to the right side of the display screen G as time elapses. Furthermore, the details of the effect being selected, for example, an explanation of what effect the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the attribute information (metadata) describing each effect content is stored in the ROM 93 or the like, and the MPU 92 stores the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 28 in the ROM 93. , and transmits a command instructing the display control device 100 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. FIG. Further, the attribute information of the effect is stored in the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103, and the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 outputs the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected based on the operation signal of the operation button 28. data) from the performance data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 and display it on the display screen G. Also, the music used in the currently selected presentation may be output from the speaker section 24 . At this time, the music output in the current presentation is temporarily stopped, and the music used in the currently selected presentation is output from the speaker section 24.例文帳に追加In this way, by presenting the details of the effect being selected to the player, the player can easily select the effect that matches his/her taste, and the interest is increased.

<Production type (type) selection processing>
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (type) selection process. The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process in FIG. 30, as described above. In this effect type selection process, the MPU 92 causes the player to select the effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4 by executing steps S2201 to S2208 as shown in FIG.

In step S2201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is not the "best result" (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2201 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S2202 it determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the opening command was received. The MPU 92 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S2202 is executed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S2202 is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S2202, and determines that 10 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 5000. judge. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). When the MPU 92 determines in step S2202 that the predetermined time has not passed since the reception of the opening command (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

Also, when the predetermined time has passed in step S2202 (YES), the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to start the effect for selecting the effect type in step S2203. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the image of the effect type selection effect on the display screen G. As described above, the effect for selecting the effect type gives the player three different types of effects of the fourth mode M4, which is shifted to when the player wins a jackpot in the lottery and is sorted to the "best result". Selection and determination are made from the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC. The player operates the operation button 28 in the effect for selecting the type of effect to select and confirm the desired effect mode.

In step S2204, the MPU 92 accepts selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, MC by the operation button 28 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 282 and/or the right direction button 283 of the operation buttons 28 to select images corresponding to the desired effects MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In this step S2204, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. do. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S2205, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 28 to confirm the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the enter button 281 has been accepted. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2205 that the pressing operation of the enter button 281 has been accepted (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, in step S2205, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 92 changes the effect MA to the fourth mode M4 after the first mode M1 in step S2206. Set as a performance. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S2205, when the confirmation operation is accepted while the image GB is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S2206. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S2205, when the confirmation operation is accepted in a state in which the image GC is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S2206. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MC in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

If it is determined in step S2205 that the pressing operation of the enter button 281 has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S2207 whether a predetermined time has elapsed. Note that the MPU 92 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed by counting the number of times the process of step S2207 is executed. For example, if the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the processing of step S2207 is 2 msec, the MPU 92 counts the number of executions of the processing of step S2207 and determines that 10 sec has elapsed when the number reaches 5000. judge. Moreover, the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S2207, if the predetermined time has passed (YES), the MPU 92, in step S2208, sets a predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, the effect MA) as the effect in the fourth mode M4. set. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. As described above, in step S2207, if the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. good.

Also, in step S2207, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 92 terminates the effect type selection process.

<Another example of effect type selection processing>
It should be noted that instead of measuring the predetermined time in steps S2202 and S2207 of FIG. 46, the determination processing of S2202 and step S2207 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of received opening commands and round start commands (hereinafter also referred to as opening commands, etc.) in step S1005 of FIG. In this case, in step S2202, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of received opening commands and the like is 3 (third round). is started, and in step S2207, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the number of receptions of the opening command etc. is 15 (the 15th round which is the final round). You may make it set the production|presentation of the initial setting of .

FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of another example of the effect type selection process. The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect type selection process in step S1413 of the effect determination process in FIG. 30, as described above. In this effect type selection process, the MPU 92 causes the player to select the effect type to be executed in the fourth mode M4 by executing steps S2301 to S2315 as shown in FIG.

In step S2301, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game result is the "best result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1401 of FIG. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the game result is not the "best result" (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2301 that the game result is the "best result" (YES), in step S2302 it sets a counter to count the number of opening commands received after receiving the opening command. .

In step S2302, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the game state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time it receives an open command or the like, and determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like has reached 3 (third round). When the MPU 92 determines in step S2303 that the number of received opening commands and the like is not equal to or greater than 3 (NO), it ends the effect type selection processing.

Further, when the number of received opening commands or the like is 3 or more at step S2303 (YES), at step S2304, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to start the effect for selecting the effect type. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display an image for effect type selection, specifically the image shown in FIG. to display.

At step S2305, the MPU 92 accepts selection of the effect type mode MA, MB, MC by the operation button 28 by the player. The player presses the left direction button 282 and/or the right direction button 283 of the operation buttons 28 to select images corresponding to the desired effects MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. . In this step S2305, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GA, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC. do. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GA larger than the other images GB and GC.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GB, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GB larger than the other images GA and GC. Further, when the player operates the operation button 28 to select the image GC, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display the selected image GC larger than the other images GA and GB.

In step S2306, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 28 to confirm the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the enter button 281 has been accepted. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2306 that the pressing operation of the enter button 281 has been accepted (YES), the MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S2306, when the confirmation operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 92 sets, in step S2307, the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S2306, when the confirmation operation is accepted while the image GB is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S2307. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 . Further, in step S2306, when the confirmation operation is accepted while the image GC is selected, the MPU 92 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the first mode M1 in step S2307. do. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MC in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

The MPU 92 determines in step S2308 whether or not an open command or the like has been received. When it is determined in step S2308 that the opening command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 terminates the effect type selection process. In addition, when it is determined that the opening command or the like is received in step S2308 (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2309 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time it receives an opening command or the like, and whether the number of receptions of the opening command or the like reaches 15 or more in the final round (15th round). determine what

In step S2309, when it is determined that the number of received opening commands, etc., is not 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 92 cancels the effect determined for the player in step S2310. It is instructed to make a notification to confirm whether Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the display control device 100 to display on the display screen G a character image for confirming whether to cancel the determined effect, such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Also, the MPU 92 controls so that the voice of “Do you want to cancel the effect?” Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Then, the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound "Do you want to cancel the performance?" Also, in step S2309, when it is determined that the number of receptions of the opening command or the like is 15 or more (15th round) which is the final round (YES), the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect processing.

In step S2311, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the effect confirmed in step S2306 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the operation button 28 by the player. In step S2311, when it is determined that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 92 returns to the operation of step S2305. If it is determined in step S2311 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 92 terminates the effect type selection process.

If it is determined in step S2306 that the pressing operation of the enter button 281 has not been accepted (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S2312 whether or not an open command or the like has been received. When it is determined in step S2312 that the opening command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 92 terminates the effect type selection process. Also, when it is determined that an opening command or the like has been received in step S2312 (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S2313 whether or not the game state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 92 increments the counter each time it receives an opening command or the like, and whether the number of receptions of the opening command or the like reaches 15 or more in the final round (15th round). determine what

In step S2313, when it is determined that it is the 15th round (YES), in step S2314, the MPU 92 performs a predetermined effect (in the first embodiment, effect MA) in the fourth mode M4 in step S2314. Set as a performance. Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage area of the RAM 94 as the effect of the fourth mode M4. In step S2313, if it is determined that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image being selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. Incidentally, the MPU 92 ends the effect type selection effect processing when the effect is set in step S2314.

Also, in step S2313, when it is not determined that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), in step S2315, the MPU 92 instructs the player to make a notification prompting the player to select and confirm the effect. Specifically, the MPU 92 causes the display control device 100 to display a character image prompting selection/confirmation of an effect such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Control. In the display control device 100, based on the instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 controls the VDP 105 to display effects such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" A character image is displayed to prompt selection/confirmation of . Also, the MPU 92 controls so that the speaker unit 24 outputs sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" Specifically, the MPU 92 stores sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!" The sound output LSI 95 is read out and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the speaker unit 24 outputs sounds such as "Determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!"

It should be noted that the timing at which the effect type selection effect is started is arbitrary. Also, the number of rounds for starting the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using a counter stored in the RAM 94 . Also, in the above description, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled up to the 14th round), but a predetermined time or a predetermined number of rounds has passed. A configuration in which the performance can be canceled up to is also possible.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, a description will be given of the transition processing to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the distribution result is the "best result". Normally, when a big win is won in a winning lottery, the performance of the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the distribution result, and after the ending period ends, the performance of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the win/fail lottery and the distribution result is the "best result", the performance C of the opening/closing execution mode is executed according to the best result. During the ending period of the effect C, the effect of the fourth mode M4 is started.

Specifically, control is performed so that the output of the music used in the fourth mode M4 effect is started during the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In the first embodiment, the timing to start outputting music and voice from the speaker section 24 changes according to the type of effect set in step S2206 or S2208 of the type of effect selection process in FIG. In the following description, in the fourth mode M4 presentation, the presentation of music is also referred to as music presentation, and the presentation of video displayed on the display screen G is also referred to as video presentation.

Hereinafter, the processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Incidentally, in the first embodiment, there are three types of effects MA to MC in the fourth mode M4, and the transition processing differs for each of the effects MA to MC. Details of transition processing for each of the effects MA to MC will be described below. It should be noted that, in the following description, right-handed navigation, which is a suggestion of a right-handed game when shifting to the fourth mode (RUSH mode), is also referred to as right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Transition processing to production MA>
First, the case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the production MA, the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 starts to be output from the speaker unit 24 from the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". controlled to be Here, in the production MA, the ending period of the production C and the period of the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro part ends at the end time T2 of the ending period. Further, the loudspeaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output after the output of the intro part of the music is completed.

In addition, in the transition processing to the effect MA, control is performed so that the sound of "A RUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro part. Specifically, the output of the voice of "A RUSH rush" is started after the voice start time TW1 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the voice of "A RUSH rush" is output at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part is finished. is controlled to terminate. Here, the voice start time TW1 is a time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "A RUSH Rush" from the output period of the ending period or the intro part. For example, if the output period of the ending period or the intro part is 10 seconds, and the audio output time of "A RUSH Rush" is 2 seconds, the audio start time TW1 is 8 seconds. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the voice "A RUSH rush" is started after 8 seconds from the start time T1 of the ending period.

In addition, at the time T2 when the ending period ends, a sound of "Right-handed" is output to suggest a right-handed game, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the voice saying "Right shot" is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MA is started. It should be noted that control may be performed so that characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G at the end time T2 of the ending period to suggest a right-handed game. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "It's a right hit", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). controlled.

<Transition processing to production MB>
Next, the case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the effect MB, the intro part of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 starts to be output from the speaker section 24 from the start time T1 of the ending period of the effect C corresponding to the "best result". controlled to be Here, in the effect MB, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the effect MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the effect C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after the ending time T2 of the ending period. Also, after the output of the intro part of the music is completed, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

In addition, in the transition processing to the effect MB, control is performed so that the sound of "B RUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro part. Specifically, the output of the sound "B RUSH rush" is started after the sound start time TW2 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the sound "B RUSH rush" is output at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part is finished. is controlled to terminate. Here, the voice start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "BRUSH Rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the intro part is 11 sec and the output time of the voice of "B RUSH Rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the sound "B RUSH rush" is started 9 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

Here, in the transition processing to the effect MB, the sound of "B RUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 over the ending time T2 of the ending period. For this reason, when the sound "Right hit" is output at the end of the ending period T2 to suggest a right-hand game, the "B RUSH rush" sound and the "Right hit" sound are output together. be done. Therefore, in the process of transitioning to this effect MB, without outputting the sound of "Right shot", at the end of the ending period T2, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right hand game is displayed on the display screen G, and the RUSH right-hand navigation is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Right hit" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Also, at the end time T2 of the ending period, control is performed so that the image effect of the effect MB is started.

<Transition processing to production MC>
Next, the case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition processing to the production MC, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker section 24 starts at the start time T1 of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "best result". controlled to be Here, in the production MC, the period of the introduction portion of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro part ends before the ending time T2 of the ending period. Also, after the output of the intro part of the music is completed, the speaker unit 24 is controlled so that the A melody part following the intro part is continuously output.

In addition, in the transition processing to the effect MC, control is performed so that the sound of "CRUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 during the output period of the intro part. Specifically, the output of the voice "C RUSH rush" is started after the voice start time TW3 from the start time T1 of the ending period, and the voice "C RUSH rush" is output at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part is finished. is controlled to terminate. Here, the voice start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "CRUSH Rush" from the output period of the intro part. For example, if the output period of the intro part is 6 seconds and the output time of the voice of "Rush to CRUSH" is 2 seconds, the voice start time TW3 is 4 seconds. In this case, control is performed so that the output of the voice "CRUSH Rush" is started 4 seconds after the start time T1 of the ending period.

In addition, in the production MC, following the output of the sound of "CRUSH rush", the sound of "please hit the right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period T2, or at approximately the same time. At the same time, it is controlled so that the output of the voice saying "Please strike right" ends. In other words, the output time of the voice "Please hit right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. In addition, in the process of transitioning to the effect MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as "please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G to suggest a right-handed game. is controlled to start right-hand navigation for RUSH.

<Production data>
Next, data used for transition processing to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. The music data and voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC of the fourth mode M4 are stored in the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 of the voice emission control device 90 as sequence data, parameter data and sound data, respectively, as described with reference to FIG. stored. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C respectively used in the productions MA to MC, and the common ROM 96 stores the sequence data and parameter data used in the productions MA to MC respectively. The sound data corresponding to the music data A to C are stored. Then, the MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 to read the sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM 93 and the sound data from the common ROM 96 and output them from the speaker unit 24 as necessary. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data A to C are output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that

Here, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, the music data A is associated with the production MA, the music data B is associated with the production MB, and the music data C is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The data is read from the common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 to control the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 . Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data B is read from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker section 24 . Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the music data C is read out from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker section 24 .

In addition, the music data A to C are respectively the intro part (prelude), the A melody part (the first melody of the song), the B melody part (the melody that follows the A melody), the chorus part (chorus), the interlude, and the out opening. It consists of multiple clauses such as (afterword). Examples of common musical compositions are shown below. Note that the following example A and example B are merely examples, and the composition of music used in the first embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → Melody A → Melody B → Chorus → Interlude → Melody A → Melody B → Chorus → Interlude → Melody C → Chorus → Outro Example B) Intro → Melody A → Melody B → Chorus → Interlude → Melody B → Chorus → C melody → Outro

The common ROM 96 and ROM 93 store the voice data A to E and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 48, respectively. Here, the audio data A to C and the audio start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to read the audio data stored in the common ROM 96 and output it from the speaker unit 24 as necessary. "B RUSH rush", voice data C is "C RUSH rush", voice data D is "Right shot", and voice data E is "Right shot please".

The ROM 93 also stores a time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. The MPU 92 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 93 when judging whether or not the ending period has ended.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, the audio data A is associated with the production MA, the audio data B is associated with the production MB, and the audio data C is associated with the production MC. Also, the audio data D is associated with the production MA, and the audio data E is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. It controls the sound output LSI 95 . More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data A and sound data D are read from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24, the sound output LSI 95 is controlled.
Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. do. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B are read from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the audio data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. ), the sound output LSI 95 is controlled.
46, the MPU 92 reads out the audio data C and the audio data E and outputs the sound from the speaker unit 24 when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process of FIG. It controls the output LSI 95 . More specifically, sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to sound data C and sound data E are read out from ROM 93 and common ROM 96, set in register 952 of sound output LSI 95, and set to sound data C and sound data E. is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24, the sound output LSI 95 is controlled.

The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data corresponding to the sound data A to C are read from the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker unit 24 based on the sound start times TW1 to TW3. Specifically, when outputting the audio data A, the MPU 92 outputs sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data A after the audio start time TW1 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 48). is read from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 and the sound output LSI 95 is controlled to output from the speaker unit 24 . When outputting the audio data B, the MPU 92 stores the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data B after the audio start time TW2 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 48). The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read from the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker section 24 . Further, when outputting the audio data C, the MPU 92 stores the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data C after the audio start time TW3 has elapsed from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 48). The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to read from the common ROM 96 and output from the speaker section 24 .

Video data used in each effect of the fourth mode M4 is stored in the effect data storage area 1031 of the program ROM 103 of the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 . Specifically, image data A to D are stored in effect data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data stored in the performance data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G according to the instruction from the MPU 92 .

Here, according to the data table, the image data A is associated with the effect MA, the image data B is associated with the effect MB, and the image data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. . 46 is the effect MB, the MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data B and display it on the display screen G. 46 is the effect MC, the MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the image data C and display it on the display screen G. FIG.

The video data D is image data for right-hand navigation for RUSH. The MPU 102 instructs the VDP 52 to read the image data D from the performance data storage area 1031 and display it on the display screen G when performing right-hand navigation for RUSH. Note that the image data D for right-hand navigation for RUSH is stored in the character ROM 106, and when performing right-hand navigation for RUSH, the MPU 102 reads the image data D from the character ROM 106 and displays it on the display screen G. may be instructed to

<Transition processing to the fourth mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the processing for shifting to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 49 to 52. FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for shifting to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the audio light emission control device 90 in the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 48 will be described. In this effect mode transition process, the MPU 92 executes steps S2401 to S2406 as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not an ending command has been received. In this determination, the MPU 92 confirms whether an ending command is stored in various flag storage areas. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2401 that an ending command has been received (YES), in step S2402 it determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 based on the flag type set in the various setting flag storage area in step S2206 or step S2208 of FIG. Also, in step S2401, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending command has not been received (NO), it ends the effect type selection process.

When the determination result of step S2402 is the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes processing to shift to the effect MA in step S2403. Note that the transition processing to the effect MA in step S2403 will be described with reference to FIG. Moreover, when the determination result of step S2402 is production|presentation MB, MPU92 performs the transition process to production|presentation MB in step S2404. In addition, the transfer processing to the effect MB in step S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. Furthermore, when the determination result of step S2402 is production|presentation MC, MPU92 performs the transition process to production|presentation MC in step S2405. It should be noted that the transition processing to the effect MC in step S2405 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S2406, the MPU 92 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S2206 or step S2208 of FIG.

<Transition processing to production MA>
Next, the transition processing to the effect MA in step S2403 of FIG. 49 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when the effect MA is set. In the transition processing to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S2501 to S2508 as shown in FIG.

In step S2501, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2504, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and TW1 is set to "2 sec", the MPU 92 sets "1000" to the timer counter as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW1. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2502, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2506, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2503, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A for the production MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and sets the music data A to the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to output from the unit 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data A from the speaker section 24 is started.

In step S2504, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the speech start time TW1 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2501. When the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW1 has passed (YES), it starts outputting the voice for the effect MA in step S2505. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data A "A RUSH Rush" for the effect MA from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data A is output from the speaker section 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data A “A RUSH Rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started. Also, when the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW1 has not passed in step S2504 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MA.

In step S2506, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2502. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts right-hand navigation for RUSH in step S2507. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data D for the production MA "Right shot" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data D is output from the speaker section 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "Right-handed" is started from the speaker unit 24, and right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. Also, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2506 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MA.

In step S2508, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the image effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92 .

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2504 and S2506 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MB>
Next, referring to FIG. 51, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MB in step S2404 of FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when setting the effect MB. In the transition processing to this effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S2601 to S2608 as shown in FIG.

In step S2601, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2604, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to and a value corresponding to the speech start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and TW2 is set to "3 sec", the MPU 92 sets the timer counter to "1500" as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW2. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2602, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2606, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2603, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the effect MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and sets the music data B to the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to output from the unit 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data B from the speaker section 24 is started.

At step S2604, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the speech start time TW2 has passed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set at step S2601. When the MPU 92 determines that the sound start time TW2 has passed (YES), it starts outputting the sound for the effect MB in step S2605. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data B "B RUSH rush" for the effect MB from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data B is output from the speaker section 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data B “B RUSH Rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW2 has not passed in step S2604 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MB.

At step S2606, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set at step S2602. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts playing navigation in step S2607. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. . Also, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2606 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MB.

In step S2608, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data B from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92 .

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2604 and S2606 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MC>
Next, referring to FIG. 52, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MC in step S2405 of FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing when the effect MC is set. In the transition processing to this effect MC, the MPU 92 executes steps S2701 to S2708 as shown in FIG.

In step S2701, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2704, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as the measurement time. For example, if the cycle of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and TW3 is set to "1 sec", the MPU 92 sets "500" to the timer counter as the waiting time (waiting period) for TW3. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2702, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S2706, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referred to and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2703, the MPU 92 starts outputting music (BGM) for the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the effect MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and sets the music data C to the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to output from the unit 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data C from the speaker unit 24 is started.

At step S2704, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the voice start time TW3 has passed after receiving the ending command based on the value of the timer counter set at step S2701. When the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW3 has passed (YES), the MPU 92 starts outputting the voice for the effect MC in step S2705. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data C "C RUSH rush" for the effect MC from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the audio data C is output from the speaker section 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the audio data C “CRUSH Rush” from the speaker unit 24 is started.

Further, in step S2705, after outputting the voice data C "C RUSH rush" for the effect MC, the MPU 92 stores the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data E "Right shot" in the ROM 93 and common data. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that the sound data E is read out from the ROM 96 and set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95 so that the sound data E is output from the speaker unit 24 . As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data E "Please hit right" from the speaker unit 24 is started. The MPU 92 controls the sound output LSI 95 so as to output the voice data E "Right shot" after the voice data C "CRUSH Rush" is output. For this reason, the speaker unit 24 outputs the voice "Rush to the CRUSH" and then the voice "Right shot". Also, when the MPU 92 determines that the voice start time TW3 has not passed in step S2704 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MC.

At step S2706, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set at step S2702. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts playing navigation in step S2707. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. . Also, when the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has not passed in step S2706 (NO), it ends the transition processing to the effect MC.

In step S2708, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data C from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92 .

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in steps S2704 and S2706 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In the first embodiment, the processing for transitioning to each of the effects MA to MC has been described assuming that the types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are three types of effects MA, MB, and MC. The types of effects are not limited to the above three types, but may be arbitrary, and may be two types, or four types or more.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57) that receives a player's operation by detecting the presence or absence of an object (for example, the player's hand or arm) within the first range AR1. , sound emission control device 90), special effect execution means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and the operation of the first accessory 310 A movable role control means (audio light emission control device 90) for controlling is provided, and the movable role control means stops the operation of the first role 310 during the operation reception period of the player.

According to the above configuration, by not operating the movable accessory while the operation accepting means is accepting the player's operation, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player. can. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(2) The operation reception means of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment stores information indicating that it is in the operation acceptance period of the player when accepting the operation of the player. ), and the movable accessory control means refers to the operation reception state storage unit and stops the operation of the movable accessory during the operation acceptance period of the player.

According to the above configuration, the operation reception means stores information indicating that the player's operation reception period is in progress in the operation reception state storage section, and the movable accessory control means refers to the operation reception state storage section. , Since it is determined whether it is during the player's operation reception period, it is a simple configuration that only checks the presence or absence of a flag to prevent malfunctions due to movable accessories and suppress control that is not intended by the player. can do. In addition, since there is no need to provide a new mechanism for determining whether it is during the player's operation reception period, it is possible to implement a function to prevent malfunction of the operation reception means by the movable accessory without increasing the cost. can.

(3) The operation accepting means of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment clears the information indicating that the player's operation accepting period stored in the operation accepting state storage unit is in progress when the player's operation accepting period ends. characterized by

According to the above configuration, when the player's operation accepting period ends, the operation accepting means clears the information stored in the operation accepting state storage unit indicating that the player's operation accepting period is in progress. After the end of the operation acceptance period, the movable accessory can be operated to produce an effect. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance by the movable accessories, and the amusement is improved.

[Second embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment prohibits the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, during the period in which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period). Malfunction of the touch sensor 57 is prevented. The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment does not perform the advance notice display lottery, in other words, does not execute the special effect by operating the touch sensor 57 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. , to prevent the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described, but the same components as those described in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect pattern determination processing according to the second embodiment.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process in FIG. 30, as described above. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display, and determines the content of the advance notice display (including the presence or absence of the notice and the result) and the timing of the occurrence of the notice display. set. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes an operation notice part, which will be described later, to prompt the player to place his or her hand over the central position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, in other words, to execute notice display. (hereinafter also referred to as notification presence notice display), and does not suggest to the player that the operation notice part to be described later is executed and the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. It has a form, in other words, a form in which the execution of the advance notice display is not notified (hereinafter also referred to as "no notice display").

Further, in the following description, among the advance notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process, only the advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 will be explained, and the explanation of other advance notice displays will be omitted. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery to determine whether to generate another advance notice display. Only a lottery may be executed as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to 57 .

In step S2801, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . In step S2801, if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process.

On the other hand, in step S2801, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), in step S2802, the MPU 92 executes the notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display. The MPU 92 uses the value of the advance notice display lottery counter to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display. Note that the notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 .

The advance notice display lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
The MPU 92 executes a lottery (announcement display lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement display based on the value of the announcement display lottery counter stored in the announcement display lottery counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the advance notice display lottery counter stored in the advance notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice display table to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display. conduct a lottery. Note that the advance notice display table is a table that stores values of random numbers relating to the occurrence of advance notice display, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, the advance notice display table is a table that is referred to when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the advance notice based on the value of the advance notice display lottery counter. The notice display table assigns a plurality of sorting results of "result without notice", "result with notice with notice", and "result with notice without notice". For example, the notice display table assigns "0 to 9" (probability 1/2) among the values "0 to 19" of the notice display lottery counter to "no notice result", and "10 to 14" (probability 1 /4) are sorted into "results with notice with notice", and "15 to 19" (probability 1/4) are sorted into "results with no notice".

At step S2803, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the announcement display lottery was won at step S2802. When the MPU 92 determines in step S2803 that the advance notice display is not to be generated (NO), it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S2804.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S2803 to generate an advance notice display (YES), in step S2804, an operation advance notice part, which will be described later, is executed to display the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. It is determined whether or not to suggest to the player to hold his/her hand over the position, in other words, whether or not to notify the execution of the advance notice display. When the MPU 92 determines to perform notification in step S2804 (YES), the MPU 92 executes notification presence notice display setting processing in step S2805. In this notice display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of the notice (with notice), the result of the notice display, and the timing for generating the notice display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven. Further, the MPU 92 sets the display screen G to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is "winning the jackpot", and sets the MPU 92 to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is not "winning the jackpot". Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

Further, in step S2805, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing of generating the notice display as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of the notice presence notice display generation timing in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. . Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from when the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the wait time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is 1 sec. Note that the standby time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines not to perform notification in step S2804 (NO), the MPU 92 executes a no-notification advance notice display setting process in step S2806. In this no-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing for generating the notification display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven. Further, the MPU 92 sets the display screen G to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is "winning the jackpot", and sets the MPU 92 to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is not "winning the jackpot". Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

Also, in step S2806, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing for generating the advance notice display as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing for generating the notice display without notice to the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. . Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from when the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the standby time for the timing of occurrence of the notice display is 1 sec. Note that the waiting time for the occurrence timing of the no-announcement advance notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 is set to drive the first accessory 310 when it is determined that the win/loss result is "winning the jackpot", and determines that the win/loss result is not "winning the jackpot". In this case, the result of the advance notice display is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 increases the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of winning is "winning a jackpot". If it is determined that it is not, the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven may be reduced, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.
In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 increases the probability of displaying a school of fish and bubbles on the display screen G, and determines that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot". In this case, the probability of setting to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G may be reduced, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.

In step S2807, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the notice display should be generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the notice display, the notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 in the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .

In the above description, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not there is a character product driving flag, and if there is a character product driving flag, the MPU 92 performs the production pattern determination processing without performing the processing after step S2802. exit. However, if the advance notice display lottery in step S2802 is won, the advance notice display processing is performed, but if the advance notice display processing is not performed, the advance notice display processing is not performed. Therefore, in the determination of the announcement display winning in step S2803, it is determined whether or not there is a flag during driving of the accessory when the lottery process is won. , the MPU 92 may terminate the effect pattern determination process.

Further, in the above description, if it is determined in step S2803 that the notice display is to be generated (YES), then in step S2804, an operation notice part, which will be described later, is executed to move the hand to the central position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. It is determined by a distribution lottery whether or not to suggest to the player that he/she holds the , in other words, whether or not to inform the player of the execution of the advance notice display. In other words, it is determined by a sorting lottery whether the notice given at the same timing is to be notified or not.
However, an advance notice of "notification present" suggesting to the player that an operation notice part, which will be described later, is held over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and a hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 A notice of "no notification" that does not suggest the fact to the player may be made at different timings.
In this case, a lottery is made as to whether or not to make an advance notice of "notice present" suggesting to the player that he/she should place his/her hand over the display screen G, and the player is suggested to place his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. A lottery will be held at each timing as to whether or not to give a notice of "no notification".

As described above, in this embodiment, in step S2801 of FIG. 53, it is determined whether or not the first role product 310 is being driven, and if the first role product 310 is being driven (YES), By terminating the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S2801, the touch sensor 57 can be detected appropriately. In other words, it is possible to prevent the touch sensor 57 from detecting the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and performing control unintended by the player.
Normally, since the operating position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. A role object 310 is arranged. For this reason, the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first role product 310 by operating the first role product 310 while accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57, even though the player is not operating it. However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is no such problem and the player can enjoy the game. Therefore, the player's satisfaction can be improved.

<Regarding the sound emission side character product driving execution process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sound emission side role product driving execution process of the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, during the period during which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period), the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is prohibited. Although the malfunction is prevented, in the second embodiment, the advance notice display lottery is not performed while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. By not executing the performance, the touch sensor 57 is prevented from being erroneously operated by the movable accessory. Therefore, when the first accessory 310 is driven, there is no warning display, and there is no need to confirm whether or not the warning display is being generated. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 54, the voice emitting side character product driving execution process in the second embodiment will be described.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the sound emission side role product driving execution process in order to drive the first role product 310 determined in the role product driving process. In this sound emitting side role product driving execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S2901, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first role product 310 by referring to the area indicating the first role product drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines not to drive the first role product 310 in step S2901 (NO), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S2902.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines to drive the first role product 310 in step S2901 (YES), in step S2902 it determines whether the first role product 310 is being driven. .
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first role product 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . When driving the first role product 310, the MPU 92 sets the role product driving flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the role product driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and the first role product 310 is set. After driving the object 310, by substituting 0 in the area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during driving of the role product is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines that the first role product 310 is being driven in step S2902 (YES), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S2903.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S2902 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), in step S2903 it determines whether or not it is time to drive the first accessory 310. . Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is zero. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S2903 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, step Without executing the processing after S2904, the voice emitting side character product driving execution processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 in step S2903 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If so, in step S2904, a character product driving execution process is executed. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first role object vertical motion motor 310a and the first role object rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the display-side role product driving process of FIG. The driving of the accessory 310 is executed.

In step S2905, the role product operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the role product operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the driving of the first role product 310 is completed. Note that the role product driving execution processing in step S2904 is the same as the role product driving execution processing of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 41, so redundant description will be omitted.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57) that receives the player's operation by detecting the presence or absence of an object (for example, the player's hand or arm) within the first range AR1. , sound emission control device 90), special effect execution means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation reception means, and the operation of the first accessory 310 and a movable accessory control means (display control device 100) for controlling. The special performance executing means is characterized in that it does not execute the special performance while the movable role product control means is operating the first role product 310 .

According to the above configuration, by not executing the special effect during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the movable accessory and to suppress the execution of control unintended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(2) The movable accessory control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in the operation state storage section (various flag storage area) when operating the movable accessory. ), and the special effect executing means refers to the operation state storage unit and does not execute the special effect when the movable accessory is in motion.

According to the above configuration, the movable accessory control means stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in the operating state storage section, and the special effect execution means refers to the operating state storage section to perform the movable role. Since it is determined whether or not the accessory is in motion, it is possible to prevent malfunctions due to the movable accessory and to suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of the flag. can. In addition, since there is no need to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function to prevent malfunction of the operation receiving means due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. .

(3) The movable accessory control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment clears the information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation, stored in the operating state storage unit, when the action of the movable accessory ends. It is characterized by

When the movement of the movable accessory ends, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion stored in the operation state storage unit. can be executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the special performance, and the amusement is improved.

[Third embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment does not execute a special effect by operating the touch sensor 57 while the first role 310, which is a movable role, is operating. prevents operation. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment does not accept an operation by the player while the movable role is operating. Prevent malfunction. The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described below, but the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as those described in the first and second embodiments, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Regarding the process of executing the announcement display on the sound emission side executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the processing for executing the announcement display on the sound emitting side.
The MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 executes the audio emission side advance notice display execution process in order to execute the advance notice display determined in the production pattern decision process. In this audio emission side advance notice display execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S3001, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3001 not to generate the advance notice display (NO), it ends the sound emitting side advance notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S3002.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3001 to generate the advance notice display (YES), in step S3002, it determines whether or not the advance notice display is being generated.
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is occurring by referring to the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . The MPU 92 assigns 1 to an area indicative of the notice display flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 to set the notice display flag to notify the result of the notice display. By substituting 0 in an area indicating the flag for the occurrence of the advance notice display provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during the notice display occurrence is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3002 that the advance notice is being displayed (YES), it executes the processing from step S3005.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3002 that the advance notice display is not being generated (NO), in step S3003, the MPU 92 judges whether or not the timing for generating the advance notice display, that is, the timing TM1 has arrived.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the timing counter TMB set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S3003 is equal to or less than "0", it determines that timing TM1 has been reached, and the value of the timing counter TMB is not "0" or less, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.
In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the waiting time (1 sec in this embodiment) for the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice has passed after the symbol display device 51 starts the variable display of the symbols, the MPU 92 returns to the timing TM1. If it is determined that the timing has reached and the standby time for the timing for generating the advance notice display has not passed, then it is determined that the timing TM1 has not reached.

When the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the advance notice display set in step S3003 has not come yet (NO), it ends the sound emission side advance notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S3004. . On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S3003 has come (YES), the MPU 92 executes notice display generation processing in step S3004. Note that the details of the advance notice display generating process in step S3004 have been described in the first embodiment, and redundant description will be omitted.

After executing the advance notice display generating process in step S3004, or when it is determined that the advance notice display is being generated in step S3002 (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S3005.
In step S3005, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 5 seconds, which is the standby time for the touch sensor, has elapsed after generating the advance notice display.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less (NO), it executes the processing from step S3006.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less (YES), it executes the processing from step S3009.

First, the processing (processing after step S3006) when it is determined in step S3005 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 is not "0" or less will be described.

In step S3006, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . In step S3006, if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 ends the audio emitting side notice display execution process without executing the processes after step S3007.
On the other hand, if the first accessory 310 is not being driven in step S3006 (NO), the MPU 92 determines in step S3007 whether or not the player has held his or her hand over the touch sensor 57 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3007 that the player does not hold his/her hand over the touch sensor 57 (NO), the MPU 92 ends the audio emission side notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S3008. .
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S3007 that the player has placed his/her hand over the touch sensor 57 (YES), in step S3008, the MPU 92 executes notice result notification processing. In this notice result notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player of the result of the notice display generated in step S3004. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the first accessory 310 and also executes display control on the display screen G and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player of the result of the advance notice display. In addition, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a notice result notification command for recognizing that the notice result notification process has been executed.
Note that the display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, but since this process has been described in the first embodiment, redundant description will be omitted.

In step S<b>3010 , the MPU 92 clears the advance notice display occurrence flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Specifically, the MPU 92 assigns 0 to an area indicating the flag for the display of advance notice provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby clearing the flag for the display of the advance notice of occurrence. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the sound emitting side notice display execution process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S3009) when it is determined that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 has become "0" or less in step S3005 (YES) will be described. do.
In step S3009, the MPU 92 executes an advance notice failure notification process. In this notice failure notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified. After that, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3008 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 92 performs light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified. do. Further, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a failure notice notification command for recognizing that the failure notice notification process has been executed.
In addition, the display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

In the above description, if the MPU 92 determines in step S3005 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less (YES), in step S3009, the MPU 92 Although the notice failure notification process for notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified is being executed, the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 is "0". '' (YES), the MPU 92 may execute the process of step S3010 without notifying the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified.

As described above, in this embodiment, in step S3006 of FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the first role product 310 is being driven, and if the first role product 310 is being driven (YES), , by ending the audio emission side notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S3007. If the 1 role product 310 is being driven (YES), the touch sensor 57 can be preferably detected by not detecting the touch sensor in step S3007. In other words, the touch sensor 57 can detect the first role product 310, which is a movable role product, to prevent unintended control by the player.
Normally, since the operating position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. A role object 310 is arranged. Therefore, even though the player does not operate the first role product 310, the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first role product 310 by operating the first role product 310 while accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57. However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is no such problem and the player can enjoy the game. can improve the player's satisfaction.

<Regarding the sound emission side character product driving execution process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sound emission side role product driving execution process of the third embodiment. In the first embodiment, during the period during which the operation of the touch sensor 57 is accepted (operation acceptance period), the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is prohibited. Although the malfunction is prevented, in the third embodiment, by not accepting the operation (input) of the touch sensor 57 while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, the movable accessory This prevents the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to Therefore, when the first accessory 310 is driven, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the advance notice display is occurring. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 56, the voice emission side character product driving execution process in the third embodiment will be described.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the sound emission side role product driving execution process in order to drive the first role product 310 determined in the role product driving process. In this sound emission side role product driving execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S3101, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first role product 310 by referring to the area indicating the first role product drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines not to drive the first role product 310 in step S3101 (NO), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S3102.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines to drive the first role product 310 in step S3101 (YES), in step S3102, it determines whether the first role product 310 is being driven. .
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first role product is being driven by referring to the area indicating the flag during the role product driving provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . When driving the first role product 310, the MPU 92 sets the role product driving flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the role product driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and the first role product 310 is set. After driving the object 310, by substituting 0 into the area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during driving of the role product is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines that the first role product is being driven in step S3102 (YES), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S3103.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3102 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), in step S3103 it determines whether or not it is time to drive the first accessory 310. . Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is zero. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3103 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, step Without executing the processing after S3104, the voice emitting side accessory driving execution processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 in step S3103 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If so, in step S3104, a character product driving execution process is executed. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first role product vertical movement motor 310a and the first role product rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the first role product drive pattern determination process of FIG. The driving of the first accessory 310 is executed. The details of the role product driving execution process in step S3104 have been described in the first embodiment, so overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

In step S3105, the role product operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 in the area indicating the role product operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the driving of the first role product 310 is completed.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment executes a special effect according to the operation reception means (touch sensor 57, sound emission control device 90) that receives the player's operation, and the reception result of the operation reception means. Special effect executing means (audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100) and movable role object control means (audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable object (first role object 310) and the operation accepting means does not accept an operation by the player while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to the above configuration, by not accepting the player's operation during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent a malfunction due to the movable accessory and suppress the execution of control not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(2) The operation receiving means of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment includes a detector for detecting the player's operation, and while the movable role control means is operating the movable role, the detector outputs It is characterized by ignoring detection results that

According to the above configuration, the operation receiving means ignores the detection result output from the detector that detects the operation of the player during the operation of the movable accessory, thereby preventing malfunction due to the movable accessory and allowing the player to Unintended control can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(3) The movable accessory control means of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in the operation state storage section (various flag storage area) when operating the movable accessory. ), and the operation receiving means refers to the motion state storage section and ignores the detection result from the detector when the movable accessory is in motion.

Information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion is stored in the motion state storage unit, and the special effect execution means refers to the motion state storage unit to determine whether the movable accessory is in motion. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation due to the movable accessory and to suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of the flag. In addition, since there is no need to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function to prevent malfunction of the operation receiving means due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. .

[Modified Examples of First to Third Embodiments]
In the above-described first to third embodiments, it is configured so that the advance notice display does not occur while the first accessory 310 is being driven. In other words, if the advance notice display occurs during the period from when the first role product drive flag is set until the first role product drive flag is cleared, this advance notice display is canceled. However, there is usually a time (time lag) of about one to several seconds from when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 until the player performs a touch operation. When the player performs the touch operation, the player must recognize that the notice display is displayed on the display screen G, and then extend the arm toward the window panel 22 to perform the touch operation. Become. Therefore, as described above, it takes about one to several seconds after the notice display is displayed on the display screen G until the player performs the touch operation.

Therefore, even if the first accessory 310 is being driven, if the driving of the first accessory 310 ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec), the occurrence of the advance notice display is not canceled and the first It may be delayed until the accessory 310 is driven. A modification of the embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the production pattern determination process according to the modification of the first to third embodiments.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process in FIG. 30, as described above. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display, and if the notice display is won, it determines whether the first accessory 310 is being driven. It is determined whether or not the 1 role product driving flag is ON, and if the first role product 310 is being driven, if the remaining time of the driving time of the first role product 310 is within a predetermined time, an advance notice is displayed. is delayed until the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed without canceling the occurrence of .

In step S3201, the MPU 92 executes a notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display.
The MPU 92 uses the value of the advance notice display lottery counter to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display. Note that the notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 .

The advance notice display lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
The MPU 92 executes a lottery (announcement display lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement display based on the value of the announcement display lottery counter stored in the announcement display lottery counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the advance notice display lottery counter stored in the advance notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice display table to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display. conduct a lottery. Note that the advance notice display table is a table that stores values of random numbers relating to the occurrence of advance notice display, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93 . Since the advance notice display table has already been explained, redundant explanation will be omitted.

In step S3202, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the announcement display lottery is won in step S3201. When the MPU 92 determines in step S3202 that the advance notice display is not to be generated (NO), it ends the production pattern determination processing without executing the processing after step S3203.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines to generate the advance notice display in step S3202 (YES), in step S3203 it determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the first accessory drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .

If the first role product 310 is being driven in step S3203 (YES), the MPU 92 calculates the remaining driving time of the first role product 310 in step S3204. Specifically, the MPU 92 subtracts the driving time of the first role object 310 up to step S3203 from the driving time of the first role object 310 in the drive pattern described in FIG. Calculate the remaining time of In this case, for example, the driving time of the first accessory 310 is recognized from the drive pattern read out in step S2101 of FIG. Based on the value of the timer counter up to step S3203, the driving time up to step S3203 is calculated. Then, the drive time of the first role product 310 calculated based on the timer counter is subtracted from the drive time of the first role product 310 recognized from the drive pattern until step S3203 to obtain the drive time of the first role product 310. Calculate the remaining time of

At step 3205, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the remaining time calculated at step S3204 is less than or equal to a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec).
At step 3205, if the remaining time is not equal to or less than the predetermined time (NO), the MPU 92 ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3206 (that is, the advance notice display is canceled).
In step S3205, if the remaining time is less than or equal to the predetermined time (YES), in step S3206, the MPU 92 executes the advance notice display setting process. In this advance notice display setting process, whether or not to suggest to the player that the operation notice part is executed and hold the hand over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, in other words, the execution of the notice display is notified. It is determined whether or not to perform When the MPU 92 determines that the notification is to be performed (YES), the MPU 92 executes notification display setting processing. In this notice display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of notice (with notice), the result of the notice display, and the timing for generating the notice display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven. Further, the MPU 92 sets the display screen G to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is "winning the jackpot", and sets the MPU 92 to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is not "winning the jackpot". Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

In addition, in step S3206, the MPU 92 sets the timing counter TMB provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 to the waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of generating the notice with notice display. Set a value corresponding to the time added. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process. Therefore, for example, when the timing counter TMB is set to 1000, the waiting time for the notification presence notice display generation timing is 2 seconds. becomes. Note that the standby time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the notification is not to be performed (NO), the MPU 92 executes a no-notification advance notice display setting process. In this no-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing for generating the notification display.
Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven. Further, the MPU 92 sets the display screen G to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is "winning the jackpot", and sets the MPU 92 to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is not "winning the jackpot". Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

In addition, in step S3206, the MPU 92 sets the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of generating the notice display without notification, and the remaining amount calculated in step S3204 at the timing for generating the notice display. Set a value corresponding to the time added. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so if the timing counter TMB is set to 1500, for example, the waiting time for the timing of the occurrence of the notice display is 3 sec. . Note that the waiting time for the occurrence timing of the no-announcement advance notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Returning to step S3203, if the first accessory 310 is not being driven in step S3203 (NO), in step S3207 the MPU 92 executes normal notice display setting processing. When the MPU 92 determines that the notification is to be performed (YES), the MPU 92 executes notification display setting processing. In this notice display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of the notice (with notice), the result of the notice display, and the timing for generating the notice display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is "winning a jackpot", it sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when it determines that the result is not "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets the The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role item 310 not to be driven.
Further, the MPU 92 sets the display screen G to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is "winning the jackpot", and sets the MPU 92 to display a school of fish and bubbles when judging that the result of winning is not "winning the jackpot". Alternatively, the result of the advance notice display may be determined by setting the display screen G so that the school of fish and bubbles are not displayed.

In addition, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing for generating the notice display as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of the notice presence notice display generation in the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. . Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from when the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the wait time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is 1 sec. Note that the standby time for the occurrence timing of the notification presence notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the notification is not to be performed (NO), the MPU 92 executes a no-notification advance notice display setting process. In this no-notification display setting process, the MPU 92 sets the presence or absence of notification (no notification), the result of the notification display, and the timing for generating the notification display.

Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display based on the information regarding the result of winning or losing. For example, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 sets to drive the first accessory 310, and when determining that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot", the first The result of the advance notice display is determined by setting the 1 role product 310 not to be driven. Further, the MPU 92 may determine the result of the advance notice display by setting the display screen G to display a school of fish or bubbles based on information relating to the result of success or failure.

In addition, in step S3207, the MPU 92 sets a value corresponding to the timing for generating an advance notice display as a waiting time (waiting period) for the timing of the occurrence of the notice display without notice to the timing counter TMB provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. . Specifically, the MPU 92 sets "500" as a value corresponding to the time from when the pattern display device 51 starts the variable display of the pattern to the timing TM1. The value set in the timing counter TMB is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec) executes a predetermined process, so the waiting time for the timing of occurrence of the non-notification display is 1 sec. Note that the waiting time for the occurrence timing of the no-announcement advance notice display is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In the modified example of the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven when it is determined that the win/loss result is a "jackpot win", and the win/fail result is not a "jackpot win". If so, the result of the advance notice display is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is "winning the jackpot", it increases the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result is "winning the jackpot". If it is determined that it is not, the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven may be reduced, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.
In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of winning is "winning a jackpot", the MPU 92 increases the probability of displaying a school of fish and bubbles on the display screen G, and determines that the result of winning is not "winning a jackpot". In this case, the probability of setting to display a school of fish or bubbles on the display screen G may be reduced, and the result of the advance notice display may be determined by drawing lots based on this probability.

In step S3208, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the notice display winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying that the notice display should be generated. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the advance notice display, the MPU 92 substitutes 0 for the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby clearing the notice winning flag.

As described above, there is usually a time (time lag) of about one to several seconds from when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 until the player performs a touch operation. As in the modified example, even if the first accessory 310 is being driven, if the driving of the first accessory 310 ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec), the occurrence of the advance notice display is not canceled. By delaying the driving of the first accessory 310 until the driving of the first accessory 310 ends, the number of times the occurrence of the advance notice display is canceled can be reduced, and the advance notice display can be performed as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player becoming bored, increase interest in the game, and allow the player to continue playing the game.

In the description of FIG. 57, when the driving of the first role product 310 ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec), the driving of the first role product 310 ends without canceling the occurrence of the advance notice display. However, it is not limited to the above method, and other methods may be used to delay the occurrence of the advance notice display until the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed without canceling it.
For example, based on the number of steps of the first accessory up/down motor that drives the first accessory 310 up and down, whether the driving of the first accessory 310 is completed within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) may be determined. In this case, for example, the number of steps required for the first accessory 310 to return to the origin position is recognized from the difference between the number of steps at the origin position and the number of steps at the current position, and the recognized number of steps is used as the pulse speed ( frequency), it is possible to calculate the time required for the first accessory 310 to return to the origin position, and whether the driving of the first accessory 310 ends within a predetermined time (for example, 1 sec) can be determined.
Note that the stepping motor is controlled to stop while gradually decreasing the rotational speed (so-called slope) when the motor is stopped, but this time is very short and can be generally ignored in this determination.

[Fourth embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment described above prevents the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory by not accepting the player's operation while the movable accessory is operating. In this embodiment, by changing (moving) the detection range of the touch sensor 57 so that the touch sensor 57 does not detect the movement of the first role object 310, which is a movable role object, the touch by the first role object 310 is detected. It prevents the sensor 57 from malfunctioning. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described below, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as those described in the first to third embodiments, and redundant description will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the touch sensor 57 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a touch sensor drive that rotationally drives the touch sensor 57 so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the game board 31. A portion 57a is provided.

FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board with the first accessory 310 of the fourth embodiment lowered to the maximum point position. As shown in FIG. 60, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the touch sensor 57 is driven by the touch sensor driving section 57a, so that the center area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR1. A detection state (see FIG. 60(a)), an upper left detection state (see FIG. 60(b)) in which the upper left region of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and a lower right region of the pattern display device 51 are detected. The lower right detection state (see FIG. 60(c)) of the range AR3 can be changed step by step.

Specifically, in the center detection state, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the touch sensor 57 has a detection range set to widen from the lower left area of the pattern display device 51 toward the upper right area. has AR1. In the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his/her hand within the detection range AR1. In addition, in the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310 because it falls within the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. In other words, in the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310 when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position.

Further, in the upper left detection state, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR2 that is set to widen from the lower left area toward the upper left area of the pattern display device 51, as shown in FIG. 60(b). is doing. In the upper left detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his/her hand within the detection range AR2. In addition, in the upper left detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57, so the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. do not have. In other words, in the upper left detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be rotated counterclockwise by being driven by the touch sensor driving section 57a, and can be changed from the center detection state to the upper left detection state.

Further, in the lower right detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects a detection range AR3, which is set to widen from the lower left region of the pattern display device 51 toward the lower right region, as shown in FIG. 60(c). have. In the lower right detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his/her hand within the detection range AR3. In addition, in the lower right detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57, so the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. no. In other words, in the lower right detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be rotated clockwise by being driven by the touch sensor driving section 57a, and can be changed from the center detection state to the lower right detection state.

Since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical system, it can detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection ranges AR1 to AR3. However, even if the first accessory 310 enters the detection range of the touch sensor 57, it will be detected, so a countermeasure is required. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the detection range of the touch sensor 57 by driving the touch sensor 57 with the touch sensor drive unit 57a when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. This prevents the touch sensor 57 from detecting the first accessory 310 .

Here, the notice display related to the touch sensor 57 includes an operation notice part that suggests the operation position of the touch sensor 57 to the player, and a touch sensor 57 that indicates the operation position of the touch sensor 57 suggested in the operation notice part. It is composed of two parts, namely, a notice result notification part for notifying the player of the result of the notice display when operated.
Here, the operation foretelling part of the present embodiment includes a notification presence notice display for suggesting to the player that he or she places his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and holding the hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. and a non-announcement display that does not suggest to the player.

In the notice presence notice display that suggests to the player that he/she should place his/her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 controls the driving of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, thereby causing the symbol display device to A central detection state (see FIG. 61(a)) in which the central area of 51 is the detection range AR1, and an upper left detection state (see FIG. 61(b)) in which the upper left area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , and the lower right detection state (see FIG. 61(c)) in which the lower right area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3, and the operation position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state. The player is suggested to hold up his/her hand, and the result of the advance notice display is notified to the player in the advance notice result reporting part.

In the non-announcement display that does not suggest to the player that he or she places his/her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 controls the driving of the touch sensor driving unit 57a in the operation announcement part, so that the symbol display device A central detection state (see FIG. 61(a)) in which the central area of 51 is the detection range AR1, and an upper left detection state (see FIG. 61(b)) in which the upper left area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , and the lower right detection state (see FIG. 61(c)) in which the lower right area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3. It should be noted that this non-announcement display does not suggest to the player that he should put his hand over the operating position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state, and the player is informed of the result of the notice display in the notice result notification part. do.
It should be noted that the MPU 92 may execute the advance notice display of different contents according to the operation position of the touch sensor 57 .

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the operation announcement part of the announcement display for each operation position. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the operation notice part, the notice existence notice display that suggests to the player to hold the hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the display of the pattern display device 51 There is also a no-announcement display that does not suggest to the player that he should hold his hand over the screen G. - 特許庁FIG. 61 is an explanatory view of the notification presence notice display for suggesting to the player to place his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. FIG.

The notice presence notice display of the central operation position is performed by executing the drive control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation notice part, as shown in FIG. is changed to a center detection state in which the center region of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR1, and an image GB1A showing that the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and a timer gauge showing the duration of the operation notice part. GB2A is displayed, and the characters "Touch me!" are displayed below this image GB1A.
Further, the non-announcement display of the central operation position is performed by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive section 57a in the operation notice part so that the touch sensor 57 is rotated and the central area of the pattern display device 51 is moved to the detection range AR1. However, no image is displayed to suggest the player to place his/her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 .

The advance notice display at the central operation position shifts to the advance notice result reporting part when the player places his/her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the advance notice result reporting part, when the big win is won or when the big win occurs. When the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice display of the central operation position, in the notice result notification part, if the result is a normal loss without winning the big win, the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. inform the person.

The notice presence notice display of the upper left operation position is performed by executing the drive control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation notice part, so that the touch sensor 57 is rotated and the pattern display device 51 is displayed as shown in FIG. An image GB1B indicating that a hand is held over the upper left position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 and a timer gauge GB2B indicating the duration of the operation notice part are changed to the upper left detection state in which the upper left area is the detection range AR2. is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below this image GB1B.
Further, the non-announcement display of the upper left operation position is performed by executing the drive control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation announcement part, by rotating the touch sensor 57 and moving the upper left area of the pattern display device 51 to the detection range AR2. However, no image is displayed to suggest the player to place his/her hand over the upper left position of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 .

The advance notice display at the upper left operation position shifts to the advance notice result reporting part when the player holds his/her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the advance notice result reporting part, when the big win is won or when the big win occurs. When the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the advance notice display at the upper left operation position, in the advance notice result notification part, if the result is normal loss without winning the big win, the result of the advance notice display is displayed in the game by not driving the first accessory 310. inform the person.

The notice presence notice display of the lower right operation position is performed by executing the driving control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation notice part, and rotating the touch sensor 57 as shown in FIG. 61(c). 51 is changed to a lower right detection state in which the lower right area of 51 is the detection range AR3, an image GB1C showing that the hand is held over the lower right position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the duration of the operation notice part. A timer gauge GB2C indicating is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below this image GB1C.
Further, the non-announcement display of the lower right operation position is executed in the operation announcement part by executing the driving control of the touch sensor driving section 57a, thereby rotating the touch sensor 57 and detecting the lower right area of the pattern display device 51. Although the state is changed to the lower right detection state of the range AR3, the image suggesting the player to hold the hand over the lower right position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 is not displayed.

The advance notice display at the lower right operation position shifts to the advance notice result reporting part when the player holds his hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the advance notice result reporting part, if the big win is won or the big win occurs. If the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, the advance notice display at the lower right operation position shows the result of the advance notice display by not driving the first accessory 310 when the result of the notice result notification part is normal loss without winning the big win. Inform the player.

Note that, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the result of the advance notice display is notified to the player depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the advance notice result notification part. The notice display informs the player of the result of the notice display by displaying a shoal of fish and bubbles on the display screen G when the jackpot has been won in the notice result notification part, thereby indicating that the player has won the jackpot. By not displaying the shoal of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when there is none, the player may be notified of the result of the advance notice display.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process in FIG. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display, and sets the content and result of the advance notice display and the timing for generating the advance notice display.

In the present embodiment, only the advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 among the advance notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process will be described, and explanations of other advance notice displays will be omitted.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery to determine whether to generate another advance notice display. Only a lottery may be executed as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to 57 .

In step S3301, the MPU 92 executes a notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display.
The MPU 92 uses the value of the advance notice display lottery counter to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display. Note that the notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 .

The advance notice display lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (announcement display lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement display based on the value of the announcement display lottery counter stored in the announcement display lottery counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the advance notice display lottery counter stored in the advance notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice display table to generate the advance notice display for each operation position. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to allow The advance notice display table is a table that stores random number values relating to the occurrence of advance notice display for each operation position, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93 .

In step S3302, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the announcement display lottery is won in step S3301.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3302 that the advance notice display is not to be generated (NO), it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3303.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3302 to generate the advance notice display (YES), it executes the advance notice display setting processing in steps S3303 to S3308. In this advance notice display setting process, the detection range is changed by rotating the touch sensor 57 depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion.
Specifically, the MPU 92 reads different table data depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion, and executes drive control of the touch sensor drive section 57a to rotate the touch sensor 57. As shown in FIG. or a lower right detection state in which the lower right area of is the detection range AR3.

If it is determined in step S3302 that the advance notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3303 whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion.
Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
In step S3303, if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 refers to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93. FIG.
On the other hand, in step S3303, if the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 refers to the second operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.

Here, the first and second operation position lottery table data is table data for defining the allocation destination of the operation position of the touch sensor 57 .
Since the first operation position lottery table data is in a state in which the first role product 310 is in motion, the touch sensor 57 does not react to the first role product 310. The upper left detection state in which the upper left area of the symbol display device 51 is the detection range AR2, or the lower right detection state in which the lower right area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3.
Since the second operation position lottery table data is in a state where the first accessory 310 is not movable, the allocation is in the center detection state in which the central area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR1, and the pattern display device The upper left detection state in which the upper left area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, or the lower right detection state in which the lower right area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3.

In step S3306, the MPU 92 executes operation position lottery processing. In this operation position lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for an operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the operation position lottery by the touch sensor 57 by comparing the first and second operation position lottery table data read in step S3304 or S3305 with the value of the operation position counter. do.

The operation position counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The operation position counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in an operation position counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (operation position lottery) for the operation position by the touch sensor 57 based on the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer, and compares this value with the first and second operation position lottery table data to determine whether the touch sensor 57 Execute the lottery for the operation position of Note that the first and second operation position lottery table data is a table storing random number values related to the operation position of the touch sensor 57, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93. FIG.

Also, in step S3306, the MPU 92 sets an operation position flag. The operation position flag is a flag for specifying the operation position of the advance notice display and the result of the advance notice display. Each operating position flag has three flags: a central operating position flag, an upper left operating position flag, and a lower right operating position flag. In other words, the MPU 92 can specify the operation position of the advance notice display and the result of the advance notice display by referring to the three areas indicating the respective operation position flags provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. can.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets only one of the operation position flags, but may set a plurality of flags.

Then, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the central operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the central operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . . Further, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the upper left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the upper left operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the upper left operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . . Further, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the lower right operation position, the MPU 92 substitutes 1 into an area indicating the lower right operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby setting the lower right operation position flag. to set.

In step S3307, the MPU 92 executes setting processing of the advance notice display corresponding to each operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the central operation position flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3307 that the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3307, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting an advance notice display of the central operation position.

In the process of setting the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position so as to be related to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that the game is not a jackpot winning, the result of the advance notice display of the central operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3307 that the upper left operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3307, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting an advance notice display of the upper left operation position.

In the process of setting the advance notice display of the upper left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display of the upper left operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display of the upper left operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that the game is not a jackpot winning, the result of the advance notice display of the upper left operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3307 that the lower right operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3307, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting an advance notice display of the lower right operation position.

In the process of setting the notice display of the lower right operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the lower right operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display of the lower right operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that it is not a jackpot winning, the result of advance notice display of the lower right operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

In step S3308, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the notice display winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying to generate the notice display of each operation position. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display for each operation position by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the result of the advance notice display of each operating position, the advance notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 into an area showing the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven when it determines that the result of winning is "big win" or "special loss". It is set so that the first accessory 310 is not driven when it is determined that it is not "winning" or "special losing result".
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is a "big win" or a "special loss result", it increases the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to drive, When it is determined that the result is not a "big hit" or a "special failure result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is lowered, and a lottery is conducted based on this probability to select each operation position. The result of the advance notice display may be determined.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display for each operation position based on the information regarding the win/fail result and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 . On the other hand, the MPU 92 may set the result of advance notice display for each operation position based on other information such as the display duration time. In short, the MPU 92 should set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery.

Specifically, in the advance notice display at the central operation position, the MPU 92 generates a ready-to-win display based on information relating to the display duration, and informs the player that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery. When it is determined that the display continuation time is long enough to be expected (for example, when super reach occurs), the display lamp device 23 is set to emit light, and when it is determined that it is not long, the display lamp device is set. 23 may be set not to emit light.

As described above, in this embodiment, in step S3203 of FIG. 57, it is determined whether or not the first role product 310 is in motion, and if the first role product 310 is being driven (YES), , table data for the first operation position lottery stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93 are referred to.
Here, in order to prevent the touch sensor 57 from reacting to the first accessory 310, the first operation position lottery table data is assigned to the upper left detection area of the pattern display device 51 with the upper left area as the detection range AR2. state, or a lower right detection state in which the lower right area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3.
That is, while driving the first role product 310, the touch sensor 57 is configured not to be distributed to the center detection state in which the detection range AR1 is the central area of the pattern display device 51 that responds to the first role product 310. Therefore, detection of the touch sensor 57 can be preferably performed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the touch sensor 57 from detecting the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and performing control unintended by the player.
Normally, since the operating position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. A role object 310 is arranged. For this reason, the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first role product 310 by operating the first role product 310 while accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57, even though the player is not operating it. However, according to the invention of the present embodiment, there is no such problem and the player can enjoy the game. Therefore, the player's satisfaction can be improved.

<Regarding the sound emission side character product driving execution process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sound emitting side role product driving execution process of the fourth embodiment. In the first embodiment, by prohibiting the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, during the period of accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57 (operation accepting period), Although malfunction is prevented, in the fourth embodiment, by changing the detection range of the touch sensor 57 while the first role object 310, which is a movable role object, is operating, the touch by the movable role object can be detected. It prevents the sensor 57 from malfunctioning. Therefore, when driving the first accessory 310, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the advance notice display is occurring. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 63, the voice emitting side character product driving execution processing in the fourth embodiment will be described.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the sound emission side role product driving execution process in order to drive the first role product 310 determined in the role product driving process. In this sound emitting side role product driving execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S3401, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first role product 310 by referring to the area indicating the first role product drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines not to drive the first role product 310 in step S3401 (NO), it ends the voice emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S3402.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines to drive the first role product 310 in step S3401 (YES), in step S3402, it determines whether the first role product 310 is being driven.
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first role product is being driven by referring to the area indicating the flag during the role product driving provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . When driving the first role product 310, the MPU 92 sets the role product driving flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the role product driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and the first role product 310 is set. After driving the object 310, by substituting 0 into the area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during driving of the role product is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines that the first role product is being driven in step S3402 (YES), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S3403.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3402 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), in step S3403 it determines whether or not it is time to drive the first accessory 310. . Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is zero. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 .

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3403 that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, step Without executing the processing after S3404, the voice emitting side accessory driving execution processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 in step S3403 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If so, in step S3404, a character product driving execution process is executed. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first role product vertical movement motor 310a and the first role product rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the first role product drive pattern determination process of FIG. The driving of the first accessory 310 is executed. In addition, since the details of the accessory driving execution process in step S3404 have been described in the first embodiment, redundant description is omitted.

In step S3405, the role product operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 in the area indicating the role product operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the driving of the first role product 310 is completed.

[Modified example of the fourth embodiment]
In the above description, in order to change the detection range of the touch sensor 57, the touch sensor driving section 57a is provided to rotationally drive the touch sensor 57 so as to be rotatable about an axis orthogonal to the game board 31. FIG.
The pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the fourth embodiment does not rotate the touch sensor 57, but drives the touch sensor 57 along a guide rail arranged along the upper side of the center frame 52. While the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating, the detection range of the touch sensor 57 that detects the operation of the player is changed (moved) to prevent malfunction of the touch sensor 57 by the first accessory 310. To prevent. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described, but the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as those described in the first to fourth embodiments, and redundant description will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a front view of the game board with the first accessory 310 of the fourth embodiment lowered to the maximum point position. As shown in FIG. 64, the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the fourth embodiment is driven by the touch sensor driving section 57a (not shown), so that the center area of the symbol display device 51 is set to the detection range AR1. A central detection state (see FIG. 64(a)), a left side detection state (see FIG. 64(b)) in which the left side area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and a right side area of the pattern display device 51 is The right detection state (see FIG. 64(c)) of the detection range AR3 can be changed step by step.

Specifically, in the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 is set so as to widen from the upper central area toward the lower central area of the pattern display device 51, as shown in FIG. 64(a). It has a detection range AR1. In the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his/her hand within the detection range AR1. In addition, in the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310 because it falls within the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57 when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. In other words, in the center detection state, the touch sensor 57 detects the first accessory 310 when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position.

Further, in the left detection state, the touch sensor 57, as shown in FIG. have. In the left detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his/her hand within the detection range AR2. In addition, in the left detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57, so the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. do not have. In other words, in the left detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be changed from the center detection state to the left side detection state by being driven by the touch sensor drive section 57a and being moved to the upper left side of the center frame.

Further, in the right detection state, the touch sensor 57 has a detection range AR3, which is set to widen from the upper right region to the lower right region of the pattern display device 51, as shown in FIG. 64(c). have. In the right side detection state, the touch sensor 57 can detect when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR3. In addition, in the right side detection state, even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position, it is outside the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57, so the touch sensor 57 cannot detect the first accessory 310. do not have. In other words, in the right detection state, the touch sensor 57 does not detect the first accessory 310 even if the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. Here, the touch sensor 57 can be changed from the center detection state to the right side detection state by being driven by the touch sensor driving section 57a to change the position to the upper left side of the center frame.

Since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical system, it can detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection ranges AR1 to AR3. However, even if the first accessory 310 enters the detection range of the touch sensor 57, it will be detected, so a countermeasure is required. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment changes the detection range of the touch sensor 57 by driving the touch sensor 57 with the touch sensor drive unit 57a when the first accessory 310 descends toward the maximum point position. This prevents the touch sensor 57 from detecting the first accessory 310 .

Here, the notice display related to the touch sensor 57 includes an operation notice part that suggests the operation position of the touch sensor 57 to the player, and a touch sensor 57 that indicates the operation position of the touch sensor 57 suggested in the operation notice part. It is composed of two parts, namely, a notice result notification part for notifying the player of the result of the notice display when operated.
Here, the operation foretelling part of the present embodiment includes a notification presence notice display for suggesting to the player that he or she places his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and holding the hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. and a non-announcement display that does not suggest to the player.

In the notice presence notice display that suggests to the player that he/she should place his/her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 controls the driving of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation notice part, thereby causing the symbol display device to A center detection state (see FIG. 65(a)) in which the central area of 51 is the detection range AR1, and a left side detection state (see FIG. 65(b)) in which the left side area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , and the right side detection state (see FIG. 65(c)) in which the area on the right side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3. The player is suggested to hold it up, and the result of the advance notice display is notified to the player in the advance notice result reporting part.

In the non-announcement display that does not suggest to the player that the player should place his/her hand over the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, the MPU 92 controls the driving of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation announcement part, so that the symbol display device A center detection state (see FIG. 65(a)) in which the central area of 51 is the detection range AR1, and a left side detection state (see FIG. 65(b)) in which the left side area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2. , and the right side detection state (see FIG. 65(c)) in which the area on the right side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3. It should be noted that this non-announced advance notice display does not suggest to the player that he/she should place his/her hand over the operating position of the touch sensor 57 corresponding to each detection state, and the player is informed of the result of the advance notice display in the advance notice result reporting part. do.
It should be noted that the MPU 92 may execute the advance notice display of different contents according to the operation position of the touch sensor 57 .

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the operation announcement part of the announcement display of each operation position. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes, in the operation notice part, a notification presence notice display that suggests to the player that he or she places his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and a hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 It also has a non-announcement display that does not suggest the player to hold it over. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of the notification presence notice display that suggests to the player to place his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. FIG.

The notice presence notice display of the central operation position is performed by executing drive control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation notice part, as shown in FIG. to change to a center detection state in which the center area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR1, and an image GB1A showing that the hand is held over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and an operation notice. A timer gauge GB2A indicating the duration of the part is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below the image GB1A.
Further, the non-announcement display of the central operation position is performed by executing the drive control of the touch sensor drive section 57a in the operation notice part, so that the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 and the pattern display device 51 is displayed. is changed to a center detection state in which the center region of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR1, but no image is displayed to suggest the player to place his or her hand over the center position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51.例文帳に追加

Then, the advance notice display at the central operation position shifts to the advance notice result notification part when the player places his hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the advance notice result notification part, if the big win is won or if the big win occurs. When the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice display of the central operation position, in the notice result notification part, if the result is a normal loss without winning the big win, the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. inform the person.

The notice presence notice display of the left operation position is performed by executing the drive control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation notice part, as shown in FIG. to change to the left side detection state in which the area on the left side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, and an image GB1B showing that the hand is held over the left side position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and an operation notice. A timer gauge GB2B indicating the duration of the part is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below the image GB1B.
Further, the non-announcement display of the left operation position is performed by executing the driving control of the touch sensor drive section 57a in the operation announcement part, so that the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 and the pattern display device 51 is displayed. is changed to the left side detection state in which the area on the left side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, but the image suggesting the player to hold the hand over the left side position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 is not displayed.

The advance notice display of the left operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his/her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big win is won or if the big win occurs. When the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the advance notice display of the left operation position, in the advance notice result notification part, if the result is normal loss without winning the big win, the result of the advance notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. inform the person.

The notice presence notice display of the right operation position is performed by executing drive control of the touch sensor driving section 57a in the operation notice part, as shown in FIG. to change to the right side detection state in which the area on the right side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3, and an image GB1C showing that the hand is held over the right side position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and an operation notice. A timer gauge GB2C indicating the duration of the part is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below the image GB1C.
Further, the non-announcement display of the right operation position is performed by executing the driving control of the touch sensor drive unit 57a in the operation announcement part, so that the touch sensor 57 is moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 and the pattern display device 51 is displayed. is changed to the right side detection state in which the area on the right side of is the detection range AR3, but no image is displayed to suggest the player to place his/her hand over the right side position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51.例文帳に追加

Then, the notice display of the right operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his/her hand over the touch sensor 57, and in the notice result notification part, if the big win is won or if the big win occurs. When the result is a special loss without winning, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the advance notice display of the right operation position, in the advance notice result notification part, if the result is normal loss without winning the big win, the result of the advance notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. inform the person.

Note that, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the result of the advance notice display is notified to the player depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the advance notice result notification part. The notice display informs the player of the result of the notice display by displaying a shoal of fish and bubbles on the display screen G when the jackpot has been won in the notice result notification part, thereby indicating that the player has won the jackpot. By not displaying the shoal of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when there is none, the player may be notified of the result of the advance notice display.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process in FIG. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display, and sets the content and result of the advance notice display and the timing for generating the advance notice display.

In the present embodiment, only the advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 among the advance notice displays for executing the lottery in the effect pattern determination process will be described, and explanations of other advance notice displays will be omitted.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to the touch sensor 57 and a lottery to determine whether to generate another advance notice display. Only a lottery may be executed as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to 57 .

In step S3501, the MPU 92 executes a notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display.
The MPU 92 uses the value of the advance notice display lottery counter to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display. Note that the notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 .

The advance notice display lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (announcement display lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement display based on the value of the announcement display lottery counter stored in the announcement display lottery counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the advance notice display lottery counter stored in the advance notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice display table to generate the advance notice display for each operation position. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to allow The advance notice display table is a table that stores random number values relating to the occurrence of advance notice display for each operation position, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93 .

At step S3502, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the announcement display lottery was won at step S3501.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3502 that the advance notice display is not to be generated (NO), it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3503.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3502 to generate an advance notice display (YES), it executes advance notice display setting processing in steps S3503 to S3508. In this advance notice display setting process, the detection range is changed by moving the touch sensor 57 depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion.
Specifically, the MPU 92 moves the touch sensor 57 by reading out different table data depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion, and executing drive control of the touch sensor drive section 57a. As shown in FIG. A right side detection state in which the area on the right side of is a detection range AR3.

If it is determined in step S3502 that the advance notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3503 whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion.
Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
In step S3503, if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), in step S3504, the MPU 92 refers to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
On the other hand, in step S3503, if the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), in step S3505, the MPU 92 reads the table data for the second operation position lottery stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93. refer.

Here, the first and second operation position lottery table data is table data for defining the allocation destination of the operation position of the touch sensor 57 .
Since the first operation position lottery table data is in a state in which the first role product 310 is in motion, the touch sensor 57 does not react to the first role product 310. A left detection state in which the area on the left side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, or a right detection state in which the area on the right side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3.
Since the second operation position lottery table data is in a state where the first accessory 310 is not movable, the allocation is in the center detection state in which the central area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR1, and the pattern display device A left detection state in which the area on the left side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR2, or a right detection state in which the area on the right side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3.

In step S3506, the MPU 92 executes operation position lottery processing. In this operation position lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for an operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes the lottery for the operation position by the touch sensor 57 by comparing the first and second operation position lottery table data read in step S3504 or S3505 with the value of the operation position counter. do.

The operation position counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in an operation position counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (operation position lottery) for the operation position by the touch sensor 57 based on the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer, and compares this value with the first and second operation position lottery table data to determine whether the touch sensor 57 Execute the lottery for the operation position of Note that the first and second operation position lottery table data is a table storing random number values related to the operation position of the touch sensor 57, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93. FIG.

Also, in step S3506, the MPU 92 sets an operation position flag. The operation position flag is a flag for specifying the operation position of the advance notice display and the result of the advance notice display. Each operating position flag has three flags: a central operating position flag, a left operating position flag, and a right operating position flag. In other words, the MPU 92 can specify the operation position of the advance notice display and the result of the advance notice display by referring to the three areas indicating the respective operation position flags provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. can.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets only one of the operation position flags, but may set a plurality of flags.

Then, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the central operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the central operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . . Further, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the left operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the left operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . . Further, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the right operation position, the MPU 92 sets the right operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the right operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. .

In step S3507, the MPU 92 executes setting processing of the advance notice display corresponding to each operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the central operation position flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3507 that the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3507, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting an advance notice display of the central operation position.

In the process of setting the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position so as to be related to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that the game is not a jackpot winning, the result of the advance notice display of the central operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3507 that the left operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3507, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting the advance notice display of the left operation position.

In the processing for setting the advance notice display of the left operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display of the left operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display of the left operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that it is not a jackpot winning, the result of advance notice display of the left operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3507 that the right operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3507, the MPU 92 executes setting processing for the advance notice display of the right operation position.

In the process of setting the notice display of the right side operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the right side operation position so as to be related to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display of the right operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " If it is determined that the game is not a jackpot winning, the result of advance notice display of the right operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

In step S3508, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying to generate the notice display of each operation position. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display for each operation position by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the results of the advance notice display of each operating position, the advance notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 into an area showing the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven when it determines that the result of winning is "big win" or "special loss". It is set so that the first accessory 310 is not driven when it is determined that it is not "winning" or "special losing result".
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is a "big win" or a "special loss result", it increases the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to drive, When it is determined that the result is not a "big hit" or a "special failure result", the probability of setting the first accessory 310 to be driven is lowered, and a lottery is conducted based on this probability to select each operation position. The result of the advance notice display may be determined.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display for each operation position based on the information regarding the win/fail result and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 . On the other hand, the MPU 92 may set the result of advance notice display for each operation position based on other information such as the display duration time. In short, the MPU 92 should set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery.

Specifically, in the advance notice display at the central operation position, the MPU 92 generates a ready-to-win display based on information relating to the display duration, and informs the player that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery. When it is determined that the display continuation time is long enough to be expected (for example, when super reach occurs), the display lamp device 23 is set to emit light, and when it is determined that it is not long, the display lamp device is set. 23 may be set not to emit light.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the touch sensor 57 can be moved along the upper side of the center frame 52 to change the detection range while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. , to prevent the touch sensor 57 from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, when driving the first role product 310, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the advance notice display is being generated. is the same as the sound emission side character product driving execution process according to the fourth embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted.

As described above, in this embodiment, in step S3503 of FIG. 66, it is determined whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion, and if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), , table data for the first operation position lottery stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93 are referred to.
Here, in order to prevent the touch sensor 57 from reacting to the first role object 310, the first operation position lottery table data is allocated to the left side detection with the left side area of the pattern display device 51 as the detection range AR2. state, or a right side detection state in which the area on the right side of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR3.
That is, while the first role product 310 is being driven, the touch sensor 57 is configured not to be distributed to the center detection state in which the detection range AR1 is the central area of the pattern display device 51 that responds to the first role product 310. Therefore, detection of the touch sensor 57 can be preferably performed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the touch sensor 57 from detecting the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, and performing control unintended by the player.
Normally, since the operating position of the touch sensor 57 differs depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensor 57 is wide. A role object 310 is arranged. For this reason, the touch sensor 57 reacts to the first role product 310 by operating the first role product 310 while accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57, even though the player is not operating it. The satisfaction of the player can be improved because the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of unintended control, for example, performance such as advance notice performance or one-shot announcement.

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment executes a special effect according to the operation reception means (touch sensor 57, sound emission control device 90) that receives the player's operation, and the reception result of the operation reception means. Special effect executing means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) and movable role object control means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable role object (first role object 310) The operation reception means changes the detection range of the player's operation so that the movable accessory does not fall within the operation of the operation reception means while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory. It is characterized by

According to the above configuration, by changing the detection range of the touch sensor while the movable accessory is operating, malfunction of the touch sensor due to the movable accessory is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(2) The operation receiving means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment detects the player's operation with a first detection range in which the detection range for detecting the player's operation does not overlap with the movement range of the movable accessory. A detection range has a second detection range that overlaps with the movement range of the movable accessory, and while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory, the player's operation is detected within the second detection range. is characterized by not performing

According to the above configuration, while the movable accessory is operating, the player's operation is not detected within the second detection range where the detection range for detecting the player's operation overlaps with the movement range of the movable accessory. Therefore, malfunction of the touch sensor due to the movable accessory is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(3) The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is characterized by comprising detection range switching means for switching between the first and second detection ranges by changing the position or orientation of the operation receiving means.

According to the above configuration, since the detection range is switched by changing the position or orientation of the operation reception means, it is possible to switch the detection range with one operation reception means.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the center frame 52 has a touch sensor 57, and the touch sensor 57 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise by being driven by the touch sensor drive section 57a, thereby enabling the player's operation. By changing (moving) the detection range of the touch sensor 57 that detects , malfunction of the touch sensor 57 by the first role object 310 is prevented while the first role object 310, which is a movable role object, is operating. .
Further, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the touch sensor 57 is driven by the touch sensor driving section 57a, and moves along the guide rail arranged along the upper side of the center frame 52, thereby causing the game to be played. By changing (moving) the detection range of the touch sensor 57 that detects a person's operation, malfunction of the touch sensor 57 by the first accessory 310 is prevented while the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, is operating. is doing.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, a plurality of touch sensors 57A to 57D are provided, and by switching the touch sensors 57A to 57D for detecting the player's touch operation according to the presence or absence of the action of the first role product 310, To prevent malfunction of the touch sensor 57 by the first role 310 while the first role 310, which is a movable role, is operating.
Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings, but the same components as those described in the first to fourth embodiments will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and display control device of the fifth embodiment.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the center frame 52 has four touch sensors 57A to 57D, each of which does not have a touch sensor driver and is fixed so as not to operate. ing.
Specifically, the touch sensor 57A is fixed to the lower left area of the pattern display device 51 . Also, the touch sensor 57B is fixed to the right central region of the pattern display device 51 . Also, the touch sensor 57C is fixed to the lower left region of the pattern display device 51 . Further, the touch sensor 57D is fixed to the lower right region of the pattern display device 51. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the detection range of the touch sensor and the first role object according to the present embodiment, (a) showing the case where the first role object is at the origin position, This shows the case where one role object is at the maximum point position.
As shown in FIG. 69, the touch sensor 57A has a detection range AR1 that is set to widen from the lower left area of the pattern display device 51 toward the upper right area. The touch sensor 57A can detect when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR1.
Further, the touch sensor 57B has a detection range AR2 that is set so as to widen from the right-side center area of the pattern display device 51 toward the left-side center area. The touch sensor 57B can detect when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR2.

Further, the touch sensors 57A and 57B have a detection range AR12 set in the central area of the pattern display device 51. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection range AR12 is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2. In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR12, each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57A and 57B employ an optical system, it is possible to detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection ranges AR1 and AR2.

In the present embodiment, the touch sensors 57A and 57B operate as a set of detection sensors, and when both the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the player's operation, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand. . In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR12 and each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand, and the player has performed an operation of holding the hand within the detection range AR12. If only one of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this by holding the hand over the area, or if neither of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, it means that the player has not held the hand over the area. judge.
In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like by judging that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the player's operation.

Further, the touch sensor 57C has a detection range AR3 that is set to widen from the lower left area of the pattern display device 51 toward the lower right area. The touch sensor 57C can detect when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR3.
Further, the touch sensor 57D has a detection range AR4 that is set to widen from the lower right area of the pattern display device 51 toward the lower left area. The touch sensor 57D can detect when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR4.

Further, the touch sensors 57C and 57D have a detection range AR34 set in the central lower area of the pattern display device 51. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection range AR34 is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR3 and AR4. In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR34, each of the touch sensors 57C and 57D can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57C and 57D employ an optical system, it is possible to detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection range AR3-AR4.

In the present embodiment, the touch sensors 57C and 57D operate as a pair of detection sensors, and when both the touch sensors 57C and 57D detect the player's operation, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand. . In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR34 and each of the touch sensors 57C and 57D detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand, and the player has performed an operation of holding the hand within the detection range AR34. If only one of the touch sensors 57C and 57D detects this by holding the hand over the area, or if neither of the touch sensors 57C and 57D detect this, it means that the player has not held the hand over the area. judge.
In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like by judging that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both of the touch sensors 57C and 57D detect the player's operation.

Here, the erroneous detection of the touch sensors 57A to 57D includes the case where the player accidentally touches the peripheral portion of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 without intending to operate it, or the window. This includes cases where the touch sensors 57A to 57D make erroneous detections due to reflection of light from the outside of the panel 22 or the like. In recent years, in particular, there are models that have an operation panel or accessories (so-called gimmicks) that extend from the side of the housing of the pachinko machine 10 toward the player in order to improve the interest of the player. It is conceivable that the touch sensors 57A to 57D may make erroneous detections when operating the pals and accessories. When the player's operation is detected, or when both of the touch sensors 57C and 57D as a set of sensors detect the player's operation, it is determined that the player has performed the above-described operation. Such false detection can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR12, which is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B, will be described.
FIG. 69(a) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the origin position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR4 of the touch sensors 57A to 57D. In the example shown in FIG. 69(a), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 69(a), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57C and 57D.

FIG. 69(b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the maximum point position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR4 of the touch sensors 57A to 57D. In the example shown in FIG. 69(b), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B overlap in plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is the position where the first accessory 310 is detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 69(b), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57C and 57D.

Note that in the following description, a state in which the detection range is the overlapping portion (detection range AR12) of the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B is referred to as a central detection state, and the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57C is referred to as a center detection state. and the detection range AR4 of the touch sensor 57D (detection range AR34) is referred to as a center lower side detection state.

Here, in this embodiment, since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical system, it is possible to detect, through the window panel 22, the action of the player holding his or her hand over the detection range AR12. Therefore, in the central detection state in which the detection range is the overlapping portion (detection range AR12) of the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B, the first accessory 310 is detected. necessary. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, while the first role product 310 is operating, the touch sensors 57A and 57B whose detection range overlaps with the operation range of the first role product 310 do not detect the player's operation, and detect The player's operation is detected by the touch sensors 57C and 57D whose range does not overlap with the motion range of the first accessory 310. - 特許庁
In this way, in this embodiment, a plurality of touch sensors 57A to 57D are provided, and switching between the center detection state and the center lower detection state according to the presence or absence of the operation of the first role object 310 allows the first role object 310 to Malfunction of the touch sensor 57 is prevented.

In this embodiment, the touch sensors 57A to 57D have two operation positions with different detection ranges for detecting the player's operation (a central detection state in which the operation position is the center of the symbol display device 51 and Although it has a lower center detection state in which the operation position is the lower center, it may have three or more operation positions. In other words, the operating means may have a plurality of operating positions with different detection ranges for detecting player's operations.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation position of the touch operation by the player is the overlapping portion (detection range AR12) of the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B, and the detection range AR3 of the touch sensor 57C. and the detection range AR4 of the touch sensor 57D (detection range AR34). However, if the performance of the touch sensor is good and erroneous detection is not a problem, the detection range other than the superimposed portion may be used as the detection range of the touch operation.

In this embodiment, the advance notice display related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D includes an operation advance notice part that suggests the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D to the player, and a touch sensor 57A according to the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D. It is composed of two parts, the announcement result notification part for notifying the player of the result of the announcement display when .about.57D is operated.
The operation advance notice part of the present embodiment includes a notice presence notice display that suggests to the player that he should place his hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and a display that suggests that the player hold his hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. It has a no-notification display that does not suggest to.

In this embodiment, as described above, the center detection state (see FIG. 70A) in which the central area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR12, and the detection range is the lower central region of the pattern display device 51. and a central lower detection state of AR34 (see FIG. 70(b)).
In the notice display with notice, the MPU 92 suggests to the player to place his or her hand over the operation position of the touch sensors 57A to 57D corresponding to each detection state, and informs the player of the result of the notice display in the notice result notification part. do.
In addition, in the non-announcement display, the player is not suggested to place his/her hand over the operation position corresponding to each detection state, and the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display in the advance notice result notification part.
It should be noted that the MPU 92 may execute advance notice display with different contents depending on the operating positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the operation notice part, the notice existence notice display that suggests to the player to hold the hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51, and the display of the pattern display device 51 There is also a no-announcement display that does not suggest to the player that he should hold his hand over the screen G. - 特許庁FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of the notification presence notice display which suggests to the player to place his or her hand over the display screen G of the pattern display device 51. FIG.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the operation announcement part of the announcement display for each operation position. 70(a), the notification display of the central operation position includes, as shown in FIG. A timer gauge GB2A indicating the duration of the image GB1A is displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below the image GB1A.
Further, the non-notification display of the central operation position does not display an image suggesting the player to place his/her hand over the central position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in the operation notification part.

Then, the notice display of the central operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his/her hand over the overlapping detection range of the touch sensors 57A and 57B, and in the notice result notification part, a big win is won. If there is, or if the result is a special loss without winning the big win, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, in the notice display of the central operation position, in the notice result notification part, if the result is a normal loss without winning the big win, the result of the notice display is played by not driving the first accessory 310. inform the person.

The notification presence notice display of the center lower operation position is, as shown in FIG. , and a timer gauge GB2B indicating the duration of the operation notice part are displayed, and the characters "Touch!" are displayed below the image GB1B.
In addition, the non-announcement display of the center lower operation position does not display an image suggesting the player to place his or her hand over the center lower position of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 in the operation announcement part. .

Then, the notice display of the center lower operation position shifts to the notice result notification part when the player holds his/her hand over the overlapping detection range of the touch sensors 57C and 57D, and in the notice result notification part, a big win is won. If it is, or if the result is a special loss without winning the big win, the player is notified of the result of the advance notice display by driving the first accessory 310 or the like.
In addition, the notice display of the center lower operation position is the result of the notice display by not driving the first accessory 310 when the result is a normal loss without winning the big win in the notice result notification part. is notified to the player.

Note that, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the result of the advance notice display is notified to the player depending on whether or not the first accessory 310 is driven in the advance notice result notification part. The notice display informs the player of the result of the notice display by displaying a shoal of fish and bubbles on the display screen G when the jackpot has been won in the notice result notification part, thereby indicating that the player has won the jackpot. By not displaying the shoal of fish or bubbles on the display screen G when there is none, the player may be notified of the result of the advance notice display.

<Production Pattern Decision Processing>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the effect pattern determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1407 of the effect determination process in FIG. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the advance notice display, and sets the content and result of the advance notice display and the timing for generating the advance notice display.

In the present embodiment, among the advance notice displays for executing the lottery in the production pattern determination process, only the advance notice displays related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D will be described, and explanations of other advance notice displays will be omitted.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D and a lottery to determine whether to generate another advance notice display. Only a lottery may be executed as to whether or not to generate an advance notice display related to the touch sensors 57A to 57D.

In step S3601, the MPU 92 executes a notice display lottery process. In this notice display lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery as to whether or not to generate the notice display.
The MPU 92 uses the value of the advance notice display lottery counter to execute a lottery as to whether or not to generate the advance notice display. Note that the notice display lottery counter is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 .

The advance notice display lottery counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the notice display lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (announcement display lottery) to determine whether or not to generate an announcement display based on the value of the announcement display lottery counter stored in the announcement display lottery counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the advance notice display lottery counter stored in the advance notice display lottery counter buffer, and compares this value with the advance notice display table to generate the advance notice display for each operation position. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to allow The advance notice display table is a table that stores random number values relating to the occurrence of advance notice display for each operation position, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93 .

At step S3602, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the announcement display lottery was won at step S3601.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3602 that the advance notice display is not to be generated (NO), it ends the effect pattern determination process without executing the processes after step S3603.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines to generate the advance notice display in step S3602 (YES), it executes advance notice display setting processing in steps S3603 to S3608. In this notice display setting process, the detection range is set based on which one of the touch sensors 57A to 57D is used to detect the touch operation, depending on whether the first accessory 310 is in motion. change.
Specifically, the MPU 92 reads out different table data depending on whether the first role product 310 is in operation, and if the first role product 310 is not in operation, the touch sensors 57C to 57D When the touch operation is detected and the first accessory 310 is in motion, the touch operation is detected only by the touch sensors 57C and 57D. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 70, the MPU 92 sets the center area of the pattern display device 51 as a detection range (detection range AR12) depending on whether the first role product 310 is in operation. and a lower center detection state in which the lower center area of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range (detection range AR34).

If it is determined in step S3602 that the advance notice display is to be generated (YES), the MPU 92 determines in step S3603 whether or not the first accessory 310 is in motion.
Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
In step S3603, when the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), the MPU 92 refers to the first operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93.
On the other hand, in step S3603, if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), the MPU 92 refers to the second operation position lottery table data stored in various table data areas of the ROM 93. do.

Here, the first and second operation position lottery table data is table data for defining the allocation destination of the operation position of the touch sensor 57 .
The first operation position lottery table data is a state in which the first role product 310 is not movable, there is no need to prevent the touch sensors 57A to 57D from responding to the first role product 310, and the allocation is a pattern. Either a central detection state in which the central region of the display device 51 is the detection range AR12 or a central lower detection state in which the central lower region of the pattern display device 51 is the detection range AR34.
The second operation position lottery table data is a state in which the first role product 310 is in motion, and in order to prevent the touch sensors 57A and 57B from reacting to the first role product 310, the allocation is determined by the pattern display device. 51 is the detection range AR34, which is the detection range AR34.

In step S3606, the MPU 92 executes operation position lottery processing. In this operation position lottery process, the MPU 92 executes a lottery for an operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 compares the first and second operation position lottery table data read out in step S3604 or S3605 with the value of the operation position counter to determine the operation position lottery by the touch sensors 57A to 57D. to run.

The operation position counter is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The notice display lottery counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in an operation position counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94 .
Then, the MPU 92 executes a lottery (operation position lottery) for operation positions by the touch sensors 57A to 57D based on the values of the operation position counters stored in the buffer for operation position counters. Specifically, the MPU 92 acquires the value of the operation position counter stored in the operation position counter buffer, and compares this value with the first operation position lottery table data to determine whether the touch sensors 57A to 57D Execute a lottery for the operating position. The first and second operation position lottery table data is a table storing random number values related to the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D, and is stored in the advance notice table storage area of the ROM 93. FIG.

Also, in step S3606, the MPU 92 sets an operation position flag. The operation position flag is a flag for specifying the operation position of the advance notice display and the result of the advance notice display. Each operating position flag has two flags, a central operating position flag and a central lower operating position flag. In other words, the MPU 92 can specify the operation position of the notice display and the result of the notice display by referring to the two areas indicating the respective operation position flags provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. can.
In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets only one of the operation position flags, but may set a plurality of flags.

Then, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the central operation position flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the central operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . . Further, when the MPU 92 generates an advance notice display of the center lower operation position, the MPU 92 substitutes 1 for the area indicating the center lower operation position flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby displaying the center lower operation position. Set the operation position flag.

In step S3607, the MPU 92 executes setting processing of the advance notice display corresponding to each operation position. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the central operation position flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines in step S3607 that the central operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3607, the MPU 92 executes processing for setting an advance notice display of the central operation position.

In the process of setting the notice display of the central operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position so as to be related to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the central operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that the game is not a jackpot winning, the result of the advance notice display of the central operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3607 that the center lower operation position flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, in step S3607, the MPU 92 executes setting processing for the advance notice display of the center lower operation position. .

In the processing for setting the notice display of the lower center operation position, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the lower center operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery. Specifically, the MPU 92 specifies the display duration time and information related to the success/failure result based on the content of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 . Then, the MPU 92 sets the result of the notice display of the center lower operation position based on the specified information and the information stored in the notice data storage area of the ROM 93 .

Specifically, when the MPU 92 determines that the result of the success or failure is "a jackpot winning" based on the information related to the result of the success or failure, the MPU 92 sets the first accessory 310 to be driven, and the result of the success or failure is " When it is determined that it is not a jackpot winning, the result of advance notice display of the central lower operation position is set by setting the first accessory 310 not to be driven.

In step S3608, the MPU 92 sets the notice winning flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG.
Here, the notice winning flag is a flag for specifying to generate the notice display of each operation position. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate the advance notice display for each operation position by referring to the area indicating the advance notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . Then, when the MPU 92 notifies the results of the advance notice display of each operating position, the advance notice winning flag is cleared by substituting 0 into an area showing the notice winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is a "big win" or a "special loss result", it is set to drive the first accessory 310, and the win/loss result is a "jackpot". If it is determined that it is not "winning" or "special losing result", it is set so that the first accessory 310 is not driven.
On the other hand, for example, when the MPU 92 determines that the win/loss result is a "big hit win" or a "special loss result", it increases the probability of setting to drive the first accessory 310, When it is determined that the result is neither a "big win" nor a "special loss result", the probability of setting the first role object 310 to be driven is lowered, and a lottery is conducted based on this probability to select each operation position. The result of the advance notice display may be determined.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the result of the advance notice display for each operation position based on the information regarding the win/fail result and the information stored in the advance notice data storage area of the ROM 93 . On the other hand, the MPU 92 may set the result of advance notice display for each operation position based on other information such as the display duration time. In short, the MPU 92 should set the result of the advance notice display of each operation position so as to have relevance to the result of the lottery.

Specifically, in the advance notice display at the central operation position, the MPU 92 generates a ready-to-win display based on information relating to the display duration, and informs the player that he or she has won a "big win" in the lottery. When it is determined that the display continuation time is long enough to be expected (for example, when super reach occurs), the display lamp device 23 is set to emit light, and when it is determined that it is not long, the display lamp device is set. 23 may be set not to emit light.

<Regarding the sound emission side advance notice display execution process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing for executing announcement display on the sound emitting side.
The MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 executes the audio emission side advance notice display execution process in order to execute the advance notice display determined in the effect pattern decision process. In this audio emission side advance notice display execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S3701, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to generate a notice display by referring to the area indicating the notice display winning flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 .
When the MPU 92 determines not to generate the notice display in step S3701 (NO), it ends the sound emitting side notice display execution processing without executing the processing after step S3702.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3701 to generate an advance notice display (YES), in step S3702, it judges whether or not an advance notice display is being generated.
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the advance notice display is occurring by referring to the area indicating the notice display occurrence flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . The MPU 92 assigns 1 to an area indicative of the notice display flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 to set the notice display flag to notify the result of the notice display. By substituting 0 in an area indicating the flag for the occurrence of the advance notice display provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during the notice display occurrence is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines in step S3702 that the advance notice is being displayed (YES), it executes the processing from step S3705.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S3702 that the advance notice display is not being generated (NO), in step S3703 it judges whether or not the timing for generating the advance notice display, that is, the timing TM1 has arrived.

Here, when the MPU 92 determines that the value of the timing counter TMB set in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 in step S3703 in FIG. When it is determined that the value of TMB is not "0" or less, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not been reached.
In other words, when the MPU 92 determines that the waiting time (1 sec in this embodiment) for the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice has elapsed after the symbol display device 51 starts the variable display of the symbols, the MPU 92 returns to the timing TM1. If it is determined that the timing has reached and the standby time for the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice display has not elapsed, it is determined that the timing TM1 has not reached.

When the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the advance notice display set in step S3703 of FIG. 72 has not come yet (NO), the sound emission side advance notice display execution processing is performed without executing the processing after step S3704. exit. On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the timing TM1 for generating the notice display set in step S3703 of FIG. 72 has come (YES), the MPU 92 executes notice display generation processing in step S3704. Note that the details of the advance notice display generating process in step S3704 have been described in the first embodiment, so redundant description will be omitted.

After executing the advance notice display generating process in step S3704, or when it is determined that the advance notice display is being generated in step S3702 (YES), the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S3705.
In step S3705, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less. In other words, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 5 seconds, which is the standby time for the touch sensor, has elapsed after generating the advance notice display.

When the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not "0" or less (NO), it executes the processing from step S3706.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less (YES), it executes the processing from step S3708.

First, the processing (processing after step S3706) when it is determined in step S3705 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 is not "0" or less will be described.

In step S3706, the MPU 92 executes touch sensor detection processing depending on whether the first accessory 310 is being driven. Details of the touch sensor detection processing in step S3707 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S3707, the MPU 92 executes a notice result notification process. In this notice result notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player of the result of the notice display generated in step S3704. Specifically, the MPU 92 executes drive control of the first accessory 310, display control on the display screen G, and audio control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player of the result of the advance notice display. In addition, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a notice result notification command for recognizing that the notice result notification process has been executed.
Note that the display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notification result notification command transmitted from the MPU 92, but since this process has been described in the first embodiment, redundant description will be omitted.

In step S3709, the MPU 92 clears the advance notice display occurring flag set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94. FIG. Specifically, the MPU 92 assigns 0 to an area indicating the flag for the display of advance notice provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, thereby clearing the flag for the display of the advance notice of occurrence. After that, the MPU 92 terminates the sound emitting side notice display execution process.

Next, the processing (processing after step S3708) when it is determined that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 has become "0" or less in step S3705 (YES) will be described. do.
In step S3708, the MPU 92 executes a notice failure notification process. In this notice failure notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified. After that, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S3709 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 92 performs light emission control of the display lamp device 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 in order to notify the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified. do. Further, the MPU 92 transmits to the display control device 100 a failure notice notification command for recognizing that the failure notice notification process has been executed.
In addition, the display control device 100 executes a predetermined process based on the advance notice failure notification command transmitted from the MPU 92 .

In the above description, if the MPU 92 determines in step S3705 that the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 has become "0" or less (YES), in step S3708, the MPU 92 Although the notice failure notification process for notifying the player that the result of the notice display could not be notified is being executed, the value set in the timer counter TB in the various counter areas of the RAM 94 by the MPU 92 is "0". '' (YES), the MPU 92 may execute the process of step S3709 without notifying the player that the result of the advance notice display could not be notified.

<Regarding Touch Sensor Detection Processing Executed by Audio Light Emission Control Device 90>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of touch sensor detection processing according to the fifth embodiment.
Here, the touch sensor detection processing executed in step S3706 of FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S3801, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first accessory 310 is being driven by referring to the area indicating the accessory driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . In step S3801, if the first accessory 310 is not being driven (NO), in step S3802, the MPU 92 detects touch operations by the touch sensors 57A, 57B and the touch sensors 57C, 57D. In other words, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been performed in at least one of the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D.
Also, in step S3801, if the first accessory 310 is being driven (YES), in step S3803, the MPU 92 only detects touch operations by the touch sensors 57C and 57D. In other words, it is determined whether a touch operation has been performed in the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D without detecting whether the touch operation has been performed in the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B. .

If a touch operation is performed in at least one of the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D in step S3802 (YES), or the touch sensors 57C and 57D are detected in step S3803. When a touch operation is performed in the detection range AR34 on which .
Further, if the touch operation is not performed in at least one of the overlapping detection range AR12 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the overlapping detection range AR34 of the touch sensors 57C and 57D in step S3802 (NO), or if the touch sensor If no touch operation is performed in the overlapping detection range AR34 of 57C and 57D (NO), the MPU 92 performs the processing of step S3709 in FIG.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the touch sensor detection process in step S3706 of FIG. 72, it is determined whether or not the first role product 310 is in motion. If it is determined (YES), the touch sensors 57A and 57B whose detection range overlaps with the operation range of the first role product 310 do not detect the operation of the player, and the detection range overlaps with the operation range of the first role product 310. A player's operation is detected by the touch sensors 57C and 57D. In other words, the detection range of the player's touch operation is switched to the detection range AR34 that does not overlap with the motion range of the first accessory 310 . As a result, the player's touch operation can be preferably detected by the touch sensors 57A to 57D. In other words, the touch sensors 57A to 57D can detect the first role product 310, which is a movable role product, to prevent unintended control by the player.
Normally, since the operation positions of the touch sensors 57A to 57D differ depending on the player, it is preferable that the detection range of the touch sensors 57A to 57D is wide. A first accessory 310 is arranged. Therefore, the touch sensors 57A to 57D react to the first role product 310 by operating the first role product 310 while the touch sensors 57A to 57D are being operated even though the player is not operating them. Therefore, the player may feel dissatisfaction due to the execution of unintended control, for example, an announcement effect or a one-shot announcement effect. Therefore, the player's satisfaction can be improved.

<Regarding the sound emission side character product driving execution process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sound emitting side role product driving execution process of the fifth embodiment. In the first embodiment, by prohibiting the operation of the first accessory 310, which is a movable accessory, during the period of accepting the operation of the touch sensor 57 (operation accepting period), Although malfunction is prevented, in this fifth embodiment, while the first role product 310, which is a movable role object, is operating, the set of touch sensors 57A to 57D that detect the player's touch operation is switched. This prevents the touch sensors 57A to 57D from malfunctioning due to the movable accessories. Therefore, when the first accessory 310 is driven, it is not necessary to confirm whether or not the advance notice display is occurring. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 74, the voice emitting side character product driving execution processing in the fifth embodiment will be described.

The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes the sound emission side role product driving execution process in order to drive the first role product 310 determined in the role product driving process. In this sound emission side role product driving execution process, the MPU 92 periodically (for example, at 2 msec intervals) executes the process shown in FIG.

In step S3901, the MPU 92 determines whether or not to drive the first role product 310 by referring to the area indicating the first role product drive flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94.
When the MPU 92 determines not to drive the first role product 310 in step S3901 (NO), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S3902.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines to drive the first role product 310 in step S3901 (YES), in step S3902 it determines whether the first role product 310 is being driven. .
Incidentally, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the first role product is being driven by referring to the area indicating the flag during the role product driving provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 . When driving the first role product 310, the MPU 92 sets the role product driving flag by substituting 1 in the area indicating the role product driving flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, and the first role product 310 is set. After driving the object 310, by substituting 0 in the area indicating the flag during driving of the role product provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94, the flag during driving of the role product is cleared.

When the MPU 92 determines that the first role product is being driven in step S3902 (YES), it ends the sound emitting side role product driving execution process without executing the processes after step S3903.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S3902 that the first accessory is not being driven (NO), it determines whether or not it is time to drive the first accessory 310 in step S3903. . Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is zero. When the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310, and the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94. is 0, the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 .

When the MPU 92 determines that it is not the timing to drive the first accessory 310 in step S3903 (NO), in other words, when the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is not 0, step Without executing the processing after S3904, the voice emitting side accessory driving execution processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that it is time to drive the first accessory 310 in step S3903 (YES), in other words, the value of the timing counter TMC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 is 0. If so, in step S3904, a character product driving execution process is executed. Specifically, the MPU 92 controls the first role product vertical movement motor 310a and the first role product rotation motor based on the drive pattern determined by the first role product drive pattern determination process of FIG. The driving of the first accessory 310 is executed. The details of the role product driving execution process in step S3904 have been described in the first embodiment, so overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

In step S3905, the role product operation start flag is cleared by substituting 0 into the area indicating the role product operation start flag provided in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 94 after the driving of the first role product 310 is completed.

[Modified example of the fifth embodiment]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a detection range of a touch sensor according to a modification of the fifth embodiment; In the fifth embodiment, the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the touch sensors 57C and 57D are set as a set to detect a touch operation from the viewpoint of noise prevention. Although necessary, as shown in FIG. 75, a form having three touch sensors 57A to 57C is also possible. Hereinafter, a modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those described in the fifth embodiment, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 of the modified example of the present embodiment includes a touch sensor 57A having a detection range AR1 that is set to widen from the lower left area of the symbol display device 51 toward the upper right area. A touch sensor 57B having a detection range AR2 set so as to widen from the side area toward the upper right area, and the pattern display device 51 so as to widen from the lower left area toward the lower right area. A touch sensor 57C having a detection range AR3 set to .

The touch sensor 57A can detect when the player's hand is held within the detection range AR1.
The touch sensor 57B can detect when the player's hand is held within the detection range AR2.
The touch sensor 57C can detect when the player's hand is held within the detection range AR3.

Further, the touch sensors 57A and 57B have a detection range AR21 set in the central upper area of the pattern display device 51. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection range AR21 is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2. In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR21, each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57A and 57B employ an optical system, it is possible to detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection ranges AR1 and AR2.

In the modified example of the present embodiment, the touch sensors 57A and 57B operate as a set of detection sensors, and when both the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the player's operation, the player performs an operation of holding his or her hand over the touch sensor. I judge that. In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR21 and each of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand, and the player has performed an operation of holding the hand within the detection range AR21. If only one of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detects this by holding the hand over the area, or if both of the touch sensors 57A and 57B do not detect this, it means that the player has not held the hand over the area. judge.
In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like by judging that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both of the touch sensors 57A and 57B detect the player's operation.

Further, the touch sensors 57A and 57C have a detection range AR13 set in the area on the lower left side of the pattern display device 51. As shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection range AR13 is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR3. In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR13, each of the touch sensors 57A and 57C can detect this.
Here, since the touch sensors 57A and 57C employ an optical system, it is possible to detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand within the detection ranges AR1 and AR3.

In the modified example of the present embodiment, the touch sensors 57A and 57C operate as a set of detection sensors, and when both the touch sensors 57A and 57C detect the player's operation, the player performs an operation of holding his or her hand over the touch sensor. I judge that. In other words, when the player holds his or her hand within the detection range AR13 and each of the touch sensors 57A and 57C detects this, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand, and the player has performed an operation of holding the hand within the detection range AR13. If only one of the touch sensors 57A and 57C detects this by holding the hand over the area, or if neither of the touch sensors 57A and 57C detect this, it means that the player has not held the hand over the area. judge.
In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like by judging that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand only when both of the touch sensors 57A and 57C detect the player's operation.

Next, the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 and the detection range AR21, which is the overlapping portion of the detection ranges AR1 and AR2 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B, will be described.
FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the origin position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR3 of the touch sensors 57A to 57C. In the example shown in FIG. 75(a), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR21 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75(a), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR13 of the touch sensors 57A and 57C do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the origin position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57C.

FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the first accessory 310 at the maximum point position and the detection ranges AR1 to AR3 of the touch sensors 57A to 57C. In the example shown in FIG. 75(b), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR21 of the touch sensors 57A and 57B overlap in plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is the position where the first accessory 310 is detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57B.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75(b), the first accessory 310 and the overlapping detection range AR13 of the touch sensors 57A and 57C do not overlap in plan view. In other words, the maximum point position is a position where the first accessory 310 is not detected by the detection sensor composed of the touch sensors 57A and 57C.

Here, in this embodiment, since the touch sensor 57 employs an optical system, it is possible to detect through the window panel 22 the action of the player holding his or her hand over the detection range AR21. For this reason, in a state in which the detection range is the overlapping portion (detection range AR21) of the detection range AR1 of the touch sensor 57A and the detection range AR2 of the touch sensor 57B, the first accessory 310 is detected, so countermeasures are required. Become. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the present embodiment, during the operation of the first role product 310, the player's operation in the detection range AR21 by the touch sensors 57A and 57B overlapping the operation range of the first role product 310 The touch sensors 57A and 57C, which do not perform detection and do not overlap the motion range of the first accessory 310, detect the player's operation in the detection range AR13.
In this way, as in the modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of touch sensors 57A to 57C are provided, and the detection state of the touch sensors 57A and 57B and the touch sensors 57A and 57C are detected according to whether or not the first accessory 310 is operated. It is also possible to prevent malfunction of the touch sensor 57 by the first role product 310 by switching the detection state by . By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of touch sensors while preventing erroneous detection due to noise, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the game machine 10 .

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment includes an operation receiving means (sound light emitting control device 90) having a plurality of detectors (touch sensors 57A to 57D) with different detection ranges for receiving the player's operation, and an operation receiving means special effect executing means (audio light emitting control device 90, display control device 100) for executing special effects according to the reception result in , and movable object control means for controlling the operation of the movable object (first object 310) (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100). The operation reception means switches the detector for detecting the player's operation so that the movable accessory does not come within the operation range of the operation reception means while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory. characterized by

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably detect the touch sensor. Specifically, while the movable accessory is operating, the touch sensor that detects the player's operation is switched to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(2) The operation reception means of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment has at least first and second detectors, and the first detector (touch sensors 57C, 57D) detects the player's operation. It has a first detection range in which the detection range does not overlap with the movement range of the movable role, and the second detectors (touch sensors 57A and 57B) detect the player's operation. Having a second detection range that overlaps with the movement range, the operation receiving means detects the player's operation with the second detector while the movable role object control means is operating the movable role object. characterized by no

According to the above configuration, since the second detector does not detect the player's operation while the movable accessory is operating, it is possible to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

(3) At least one of the first and second detectors of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is composed of a set of touch sensors, and the operation accepting means is at least one of the first and second detectors. It is characterized by recognizing that a player's operation has been performed when a player's operation is detected by a set of touch sensors provided in the.

According to the above configuration, only when a set of touch sensors provided in the first and second detectors detects the operation of the player, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand over, so that noise and the like can be detected. False detection can be prevented. More specifically, when the player accidentally touches the peripheral portion of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 without intending to operate it, or when light from the outside of the window panel 22 is touched. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to reflection or the like.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are individually stored in the common ROM 96 of the voice emission control device 90, and the music data used in the productions MA to MC are stored separately. (BGM) Separately from A to C, audio data A to C of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are read out and output respectively. However, as described with reference to FIG. 48, during the output of the intro portion of the music used in the productions MA to MC, the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are heard. output respectively. For this reason, the intro parts of the music data A to C may include sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. In this sixth embodiment, an embodiment will be described in which the intro parts of music data A to C include sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described below, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description will be omitted.

<Production data>
FIG. 76 shows music data stored in the common ROM 96. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the intro parts of each of the music data A to C contain audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush". If you include a voice such as "Please hit right" in the intro part of the music, when the music finishes playing and returns to the beginning and restarts the music output, so-called loop processing, "Please hit right" Please” is output even when looping (when playing for the second time and later). Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable not to include the intro part in the loop processing.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data used in each of the productions MA to MC are divided into an intro part and other loop parts. It is stored in the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 . More specifically, each of the music data A to C includes sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data only for the intro part including audio data such as "Please hit right", and excluding the intro part. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data after the A melody are divided and stored in the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 .

Then, for example, when the music data A used in the production MA is to be looped, the MPU 92 reproduces the music data of the intro part at the time of outputting the music for the first time, and then reproduces the music data of the loop part. When the music data of the part is completed, the process of outputting the music data of the loop part again (hereinafter also referred to as loop processing) is performed. In addition, by performing the same processing as above for the music data B and C used in the production MB and MC, during the loop processing, the voice such as "Please hit the right" is played for the second and subsequent times (loop (during processing) is also prevented from being output.

The sound "A RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data A is set so that the output of the sound "A RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data A ends. ing. In addition, the sound "B RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data B is set so that the output of the sound "B RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data B ends. ing. Furthermore, the sound "C RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data C is set so that the output of the sound "C RUSH rush" ends at the same time or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data C ends. ing.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 93, the music data A is associated with the production MA, the music data B is associated with the production MB, and the music data C is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. Control. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. do. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. do. More specifically, the MPU 92 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 based on the program and processing data stored in the ROM 93, and sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95. . The sound output LSI 95 outputs (reproduces) the music data A to C from the speaker section 24 based on the data set in the register 952 .

Furthermore, sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data D and E are stored in the ROM 93 and common ROM 96 . The MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the sound data stored in the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 as necessary, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and outputs the sound data D and E to the speaker. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled to output (reproduce) from the unit 24 . Here, the voice data D is a voice data of "Right shot", and the voice data E is "Right shot please". Here, the audio data D is associated with the production MA, and the audio data E is associated with the production MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. Control. Further, when the effect type set in step S2206 or S2208 of the effect type selection process in FIG. do.

<Transition processing to production MA>
Next, the transition processing to the effect MA in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the transition processing to the effect MA of this embodiment. In the transition processing to the effect MA, the MPU 92 executes steps S4001 to S4006 as shown in FIG.

In step S4001, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S4003, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE to the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4002, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data A from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data A is output from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data A from the speaker section 24 is started. Also, the intro part of the music data A includes audio data of "A RUSH Rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro part of the music data A, the voice "A RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker section 24 in time with the intro part of the music data A. FIG.

In step S4003, the MPU 92 determines whether the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S4001. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S4004. Specifically, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D "right-handed" from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and sets the sound data D to The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so as to output from the speaker section 24 . As a result, the output (playback) of the audio data D “Right shot” from the speaker unit 24 is started.

In step S4005, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the image effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data A from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92 .

In step S4006, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data A has ended. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 are set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is set so that the loop portion of the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. to control. Further, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data A when the output of the music data A has not ended.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S4003 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MB>
Next, referring to FIG. 78, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MB in this embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing to the effect MB of the present embodiment. In the transition processing to this effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S4101 to S4106 as shown in FIG.

In step S4101, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S4103, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the cycle of the timer interrupt process is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE to the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4102, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data B from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data B is output from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data B from the speaker section 24 is started. Also, the intro part of music data B includes audio data of "B RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro part of the music data B, the voice "B RUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24 in time with the intro part of the music data B. FIG.

In step S4103, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S4101. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), it starts right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S4104. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. .

In step S4105, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the image effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data B from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92 .

In step S4106, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data B has ended. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 are set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is set so that the loop portion of the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. to control. Further, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data B when the output of the music data B has not finished.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S4103 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition processing to production MC>
Next, referring to FIG. 79, a detailed description will be given of the transition processing to the effect MC in this embodiment. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flow chart of transition processing to the effect MC of the present embodiment. In the transition processing to this effect MB, the MPU 92 executes steps S4201 to S4206 as shown in FIG.

In step S4201, the MPU 92 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 94 in order to measure the time of step S4203, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 93 is referenced and a value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the period of timer interrupt processing is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 92 sets "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE to the timer counter. The value set in the timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4202, the MPU 92 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 93 and common ROM 96, sets them in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the music data C is output from the speaker unit 24. The sound output LSI 95 is controlled so that As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro part of the music data C from the speaker unit 24 is started. Also, the intro part of the music data C includes voice data of "Rush into CRUSH" and "Right hit". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW3) has elapsed from the start of the output of the intro part of the music data C, the voice "C RUSH rush" is output from the speaker unit 24 in time with the intro part of the music data C, and the voice "C RUSH rush" is output. After the output, the voice of "Please strike right" is output (reproduced).

In step S4203, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S4201. When the MPU 92 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 92 starts playing navigation in step S4204. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . Based on an instruction from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the video data D from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G, and right-hand navigation for RUSH is started. .

In step S4205, the MPU 92 instructs the display control device 100 to start the image effect of the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 92 instructs the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the performance data storage area 1031 . The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads the video data C from the performance data storage area 1031 and controls the VDP 105 to display it on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 92 .

In step S4206, the MPU 92 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the output of the music data C has ended. The sequence data, parameter data and sound data to be read from the ROM 93 and the common ROM 96 are set in the register 952 of the sound output LSI 95, and the sound output LSI 95 is set so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker unit 24. Control. Further, the MPU 92 does not read the loop portion of the music data C when the output of the music data C has not finished.

Note that the configuration for measuring the time in step S4203 is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

According to this embodiment, the following functions and effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment includes sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" in the intro parts of the music data (BGM) A to C, respectively. . Therefore, it is not necessary to separately store the music data and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) in the storage means (ROM 93 and common ROM 96), and "A RUSH rush" and "B RUSH rush" are not necessary. , there is no need to measure the time for outputting the voice of "C RUSH Rush". Therefore, the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM 93 and common ROM 96) can be saved. Also, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 92 can be reduced. Also, the player can recognize the game state from the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" included in the first data. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game, and to improve the sense of anticipation for the game. In addition, the data of the intro part that contains the audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" is not played repeatedly, and the data after the A melody excluding the intro part is played repeatedly. Since it is reproduced, the player does not feel annoyed by the repeated reproduction of the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush". Other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the transition processing to each of the effects MA to MC has been described assuming that the types of effects in the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are three types of effects MA, MB, and MC. The types of effects are not limited to the three types described above, but may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four types or more.

Further, in the above embodiment, an embodiment is described in which the intro portion of the music is reproduced when transitioning to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode), but the present invention is applicable only when transitioning to the fourth mode M4. It can be applied to all mode transitions involving music changes.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above embodiment, the MPU 92, the sound output LSI 95, and the common ROM 96 are mounted on the sound emission control board 91 of the sound emission control device 90. FIG. In the first and sixth embodiments, the MPU 92 determines the content of the effect for a predetermined period based on the command received from the main control device 60, and performs light emission control on various lamp units according to the content. have a function. Further, the MPU 92 instructs the sound output LSI 95 to output sound according to the content of the determined effect, and causes the sound output LSI 95 to control the sound output from the speaker section 24 .

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, a sound light emission control board 91 is provided with a sound light SOC (System On a Chip) 97 and a sound light ROM 98 . The SOC 97 for sound and light includes a control core 971 that determines the execution content of the performance according to the command received from the main control device and controls the light emission of the display lamp device 23 according to the determined content of the performance, and the control core 971 is determined. From the sound output core 972 that controls the sound output of the speaker unit 24 according to the content of the presentation, the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory Access) 972c of the control core 971, and the data transfer unit 971c of the sound output core 972 and a memory controller 974 for reading data from the sound and light ROM 98 in accordance with the transmitted address data. In this case, the sound output core 972 has priority over the control core 971 in reading data.

<Electrical configuration related to production execution control>
The electrical configuration for controlling the performance of the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted.

A sound emission control device 90 is provided as a control device for controlling the execution of effects based on instructions from the main control device 60 . As shown in FIG. 80, the audio emission control device 90 includes an audio emission control board 91 on which a sound and light SOC 97, a sound and light ROM 98, and an amplifier circuit 99 are mounted. The sound and light SOC 97 includes a control core 971, a sound output core 972, a sound data processing section 973, and a memory controller 974, and the sound and light SOC 97 is configured by integrating these elements into one chip.

The control core 971 determines the specific contents of the presentation based on the command received from the main controller 60, and controls the light emission of the indicator lamp device 23 according to the determined contents. In addition, the control core 971 sets data corresponding to the content of the determined effect to the register 972a provided in the sound output core 972, and sends a command corresponding to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 100. Send to As a result, the sound output core 972 executes sound output control in accordance with the content instructed by the control core 971, and the display control device 100 performs display control in accordance with the content instructed by the control core 971. Run. Incidentally, the setting of data to the register 972a of the sound output core 972 by the control core 971 is performed through the data bus SL that electrically connects the control core 971 and the sound output core 972 in the SOC 97 for sound and light. Two-way communication is possible between the control core 971 and the sound output core 972 through the data bus SL. A signal indicating that sound is being output is transmitted from 972 to the control core 971 .

The control core 971 includes a CPU 971a, which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, and is used for reading program data and control data stored in advance in the sound and light ROM 98, and for executing programs. A RAM 971b is incorporated for temporarily storing data necessary for the operation. The RAM 971b is configured to use a memory such as an SRAM or a DRAM that requires an external power supply to hold data (that is, a volatile storage means) for both reading and writing. , the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 98 for sound and light. The data capacity of the RAM 971b has a data capacity of many bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the ROM 98 for sound and light. However, the data capacity of the RAM 971b is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the control core 971 can preferably execute control.

The control core 971 also incorporates a data transfer section 971c that instructs the memory controller 974 to read data from the sound and light ROM 98 based on instructions from the CPU 971a. When the CPU 971a writes the data corresponding to the data read instruction to the internal register of the data transfer unit 971c, the data transfer unit 971c waits until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read to the RAM 971b. to transmit the address data for the data read instruction. The transmission of this address data is performed in synchronization with a clock signal (for example, 4 MHz) periodically transmitted from a clock circuit incorporated in the data transfer section 971c.

The sound output core 972 executes sound output control of the speaker unit 24 according to the content of the presentation determined by the control core 971 . The sound output core 972 incorporates a register 972a, an HWD 972b, an SCM 972d, and a data transfer section 972c.

The register 972a has a function as storage means for temporarily storing various data used by the sound output core 972, and is used as a read/write memory that requires power supply from the outside to hold the data. configured to use. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is shorter than that of the ROM 98 for sound and light. The register 972a has a data capacity of multiple bytes so that it can store a plurality of data simultaneously, and has a data capacity in units of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound and light ROM 98 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 971 b of the control core 971 . However, the data capacity of the register 972a is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as the sound output core 972 can preferably execute control.

The HWD 972b and SCM 972d have the function of creating digital musical tone data using the tone data read from the sound and light ROM 98 according to the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the control core 971 and stored in the register 972a. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data defining the pitch, volume, and timbre of sounds at a predetermined timing. there is These sequence data and parameter data are set as a set of mutually corresponding data, and a series of sound outputs are enabled by using the set of sequence data and parameter data. In addition, the period of sound output determined by a set of sequence data and parameter data is constant at a specific time regardless of the types of sequence data and parameter data. It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the mode. However, it is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Moreover, it may be configured to be a series of melodies, and in this case, the sound output period determined by the sequence data and the parameter data will vary according to the types of those data.

The HWD 972b creates digital musical tone data for reproducing pre-sampled recorded data, and creates sine wave data using HWD recorded data stored in advance in the ROM 98 for sound and light. , enabling playback of recorded data. The recording data may be compressed data such as MP3 or non-compressed data. The SCM 972d does not create digital musical tone data from recorded data for a predetermined period of time, but rather creates digital musical tone data by combining rectangular wave data pre-stored in the sound and light ROM 98 in chronological order. It enables the reproduction of sound (so-called "pico-pico" sound).

Here, the configuration of the register 972a used for creating digital musical tone data in the HWD 972b and SCM 972d will be described with reference to FIG. A sequence area 111, a parameter area 112, an HWD area 113, and an SCM area 114 are provided in the register 972a. Already described sequence data is written in the sequence area 111 and already described parameter data is written in the parameter area 112 .

By referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, the HWD 972b reads the recording data stored in the sound and light ROM 98 to the HWD area 113, and records the data. The recorded sound can be output by creating digital musical sound data from the data. The HWD area 113 is provided with a 1st CH area 113a to a 16th CH area 113p, and digital musical tone data can be created based on different recorded data in each of the CH areas 113a to 143p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recorded data.

By referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 111 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 112, the SCM 972d reads out the rectangular wave data stored in the sound and light ROM 98 to the SCM area 114, and converts the rectangular wave data into the SCM area 114. Electronic sound can be output by creating digital musical sound data from wave data. The SCM area 114 is provided with a 1st CH area 114a to a 16th CH area 114p, and different digital musical tone data can be created in each of the CH areas 114a to 144p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different electronic sounds.

The 1st CH area 113a to the 16th CH area 113p of the HWD area 113 and the 1st CH area 114a to the 16th CH area 114p of the SCM area 114 each have an area capable of storing two pieces of already created digital musical tone data. In the middle of performing sound output control using the digital musical sound data created in one of the storable areas, digital data corresponding to the next execution period for the execution period of the sound output control Musical tone data is created in the other storable area. As a result, while sound is being output, digital musical sound data necessary for the execution period of the next sound output control can be generated in parallel, and sound can be output continuously.

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, the sound data processing unit 973 of the sound and light SOC 97 has a function as a digital/analog converter, and is used to convert the digital musical sound data created in the HWD area 113 of the register 972a and the SCM area. The digital musical tone data created in 114 is converted into an analog sound signal and output to the amplifier circuit 99 formed on the display control board 101 . The amplifier circuit 99 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level corresponding to the sound volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker section 24 . As a result, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker section 24 . In addition, the sound data processing unit 973 synthesizes the digital musical sound data when the plurality of CH areas 113a to 143p in the HWD area 113 simultaneously create digital musical sound data, and also synthesizes the digital musical sound data. When digital musical tone data are simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas 114a to 144p, the digital musical tone data are synthesized. Further, when digital musical tone data is created in each of the HWD area 113 and the SCM area 114, these digital musical tone data are synthesized. When synthesis is performed in this way, the synthesized digital synthesized tone data is converted into an analog tone signal, amplified by the amplifier circuit 99 as described above, and then output to the speaker unit 24 . Thereby, it becomes possible to output a plurality of different sounds from the speaker unit 24 at the same time.

As described above, when sound is output, sound data, which is either recorded data or rectangular wave data, is read from the sound/light ROM 98 to the register 972a. This is performed by the data transfer section 972c of the sound output core 972 based on the stored sequence data.

82 showing an example of the sequence data, the sequence data SD includes pointer data set corresponding to the processing timing of the sound output core 972. , content data for sound output and content data for data transfer are determined in association with each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 972 is generated in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) incorporated in the sound output core 972 . In this case, the cycle of the clock signal is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the data transfer section 972c, specifically 10 MHz. When the processing timing of the sound output core 972 comes, the HWD 972b, the SCM 972d and the data transfer section 972c respectively perform operations corresponding to the sequence data and the parameter data.

The content data of the sound output in the sequence data SD is used to create digital musical sound data for each channel in the HWD 972b and SCM 972d. In this case, the content data of the sound output is set in correspondence with the pointer data, and the creation of the digital musical sound data based on the content data of the sound output set in correspondence with each pointer data is transferred to the register 972a in advance. It is performed using the sound data obtained.

The content data of the data transfer in the sequence data SD is used in the data transfer section 972c to specify the timing of reading data from the sound and light ROM 98, and is used to specify the area of the sound and light ROM 98 where the data to be read is stored. Used to identify address data. The content data of the data transfer is data so that there are a plurality of predetermined pointer data between the read timing of the sound data corresponding to one channel and the read timing of the sound data corresponding to the next channel. Read instruction data is set. The data of the data readout instruction of 1 is set with the data for reading out the sound data of the data amount that enables the output of the sound for a predetermined time. Supports individual channels. Therefore, when outputting sound by synthesizing a plurality of digital musical tone data, data readout instructions are issued for the same number of digital musical tone data. Also, the sound data read out based on one data readout instruction corresponds to data that enables sound output over the predetermined time of 700 μsec in the corresponding channel. In this case, the HWD 972b and SCM 972d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read 700 μsec worth of sound data for each of these 16 channels is shorter than 700 μsec. As a result, while outputting sounds for a predetermined time period, it is possible to create digital musical tone data for enabling output of sounds for a next predetermined time period following the current predetermined time period.

The data transfer section 971c of the control core 971 and the data transfer section 972c of the sound output core 972 respectively read data from the common ROM 98 for sound and light. The sound and light ROM 98 is configured to use a memory that does not require external power supply for storing data (that is, a non-volatile storage means) as a read-only memory. Specifically, a NOR flash memory is used as the ROM 98 for sound and light, but a NAND flash memory may be used. The sound and light ROM 98 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processes according to the programs.

The data structure of the ROM 98 for sound and light will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the sound and light ROM 98, program data (1), program data (2), . remembered. By using these program data, the CPU 971a executes main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. The sound and light ROM 98 stores in advance processing data (1), processing data (2), . These processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, and sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 972 . Command data (1), command data (2), . These command data are used by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 to instruct the display control device 100 on the contents of the presentation.

In addition to the data used for executing processing by the CPU 971a of the control core 971 as described above, the sound and light ROM 98 stores light emission data (1), light emission data (2), . (P) is stored, and sound data (1), sound data (2), . . . , sound data (Q) are also stored. In each light emission data, information on the type of light emitting portion to be lit by the display lamp device 23, the lighting period, and the lighting order is set in a predetermined effect period. It differs depending on the type of data. The light emission data stored in the ROM 98 for sound and light differ in the target light emission control period and in the content of the light emission pattern. Further, each sound data includes recorded data consisting of a sine wave and rectangular wave data used for outputting an electronic sound.
As shown in FIG. 80, the sound and light ROM 98 is electrically connected to the memory controller 974 of the sound and light SOC 97 via an address bus SL1 and a data bus SL2. The memory controller 974 is electrically connected to the control core 971 via the address bus SL3 and data bus SL4, and is electrically connected to the sound output core 972 via the address bus SL5 and data bus SL6. .

The memory controller 974 receives address data to be read from the data transfer unit 971c of the control core 971 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 974 has a control-side address buffer 974a for storing the address data received from the data transfer section 971c. is received, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 974a. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer section 971c via the data bus SL4, whereby the address data is normally received in the data transfer section 971c. It is specified that On the other hand, when new address data is received from the data transfer unit 971c while unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer 974a, the address data is not stored in the control side address buffer 974a. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer section 971c, the data transfer section 971c specifies that the same address data needs to be sent again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 971c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data to the sound and light ROM 98 via the address bus SL1, and transmits the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. is received from the ROM 98 for sound and light. Then, the received data is transmitted to the RAM 971b of the control core 971 or the internal register of the CPU 971a via the data bus SL4.

The memory controller 974 receives address data to be read from the data transfer section 972c of the sound output core 972 via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 974 includes a sound output side address buffer 974b for storing the address data received from the data transfer section 972c. When data is received, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 974 to the data transfer section 972c via the data bus SL6, whereby the address data is normally received in the data transfer section 972c. It is specified that On the other hand, when new address data is received from the data transfer unit 972c while unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 974b. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer section 972c, the data transfer section 972c specifies that the same address data needs to be sent again.

When it corresponds to the address data transmitted from the data transfer section 972c, the memory controller 974 transmits the address data to the sound and light ROM 98 via the address bus SL1, and transmits the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. is received from the ROM 98 for sound and light. Then, it transmits the received data to the register 972a of the sound output core 972 via the data bus SL6.

The memory controller 974 incorporates a clock circuit, and processing in the memory controller 974 is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the period of the clock signal is shorter than the period of the clock signal of the data transfer section 972c and the period of the clock signal of the sound output core 972, specifically 15 MHz.

[Group of inventions extracted from each embodiment]
The features of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described below. Among the features of the group of inventions, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the group of inventions are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the features of the group of inventions Combinations of features such as modifications, improvements, etc. within the range that can achieve the purpose are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1.
an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, sound emission control device 90) for receiving an operation by a player;
special effect executing means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation receiving means;
Movable role product control means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable role product (first role product 310),
The gaming machine, wherein the movable accessory control means stops the movement of the movable accessory during a period in which the player's operation is accepted.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group,
Detection of the touch sensor can be preferably performed. Specifically, by not operating the movable accessory while the operation accepting means accepts the player's operation, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the movable accessory and to suppress unintended control by the player. . Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the invention group,
The operation receiving means is
When accepting the player's operation, storing information indicating that the player's operation is being accepted in an operation acceptance state storage unit (various flag storage area),
The movable accessory control means is
A gaming machine, wherein the action of the movable accessory is stopped during a period of accepting the operation by the player by referring to the operation accepting state storage unit.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group,
The operation reception means stores information indicating that it is in the operation reception period of the player in the operation reception state storage section, and the movable accessory control means refers to the operation reception state storage section to accept the player's operation. Since it is determined whether it is in the period or not, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation due to the movable accessory and to suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration that only checks the presence or absence of the flag. In addition, since there is no need to provide a new mechanism for determining whether it is during the player's operation reception period, it is possible to implement a function to prevent malfunction of the operation reception means by the movable accessory without increasing the cost. can.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A2 of the invention group,
The operation receiving means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the operation reception period of the player ends, the information stored in the operation reception state storage unit indicating that the operation reception period of the player is in progress is cleared.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group,
When the player's operation reception period ends, the operation reception means clears the information stored in the operation reception state storage unit indicating that it is during the player's operation reception period. A production can be performed by operating the movable accessory. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance by the movable accessories, and the amusement is improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3 of the invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation reception notification means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for informing that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature A4 of the present invention group,
Since it is notified that the player's operation is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's taste is improved.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the invention group,
The game machine characterized in that the operation reception notification means randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group,
Since the fact that the player's operation is being accepted is randomly notified, the player can be given an expectation that a special performance may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is a sense of anticipation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5 of the invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, expects the player to expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by executing a notice performance).

According to feature A6 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is executed, it is possible to further improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6 of the invention group,
Determination means (MPU 92) for determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means ends within a predetermined time,
The special production execution means is
When the action of the movable accessory ends within a predetermined time, the execution of the special presentation is not canceled, and the special presentation is performed after the action of the movable accessory ends.

According to feature A7 of the present invention group,
There is usually a time (time lag) of about one to several seconds from when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 until the player performs a touch operation. determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means ends within a predetermined time, and if the operation of the movable accessory ends within the predetermined time, without canceling the special performance, By executing the special performance after the motion of the movable accessory is finished, the number of times the occurrence of the special performance is canceled can be reduced, and the special performance can be performed as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player becoming bored, increase interest in the game, and allow the player to continue playing the game.

According to the characteristic group A of the present invention, by not operating the movable role while the action accepting means accepts the player's operation, malfunction due to the movable role is prevented, and control unintended by the player is performed. The following problem can be solved because it is possible to suppress the cracking.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that has operation means such as a touch sensor that receives an input when operated by a player. For example, in conventional gaming machines, a specific control state (a In some cases, an expected effect is executed to make the player expect that the game state will shift to a payout state.

However, in recent gaming machines, movable accessories are arranged around the symbol display device, and depending on the movement timing and movable range of the movable accessories, the touch sensor may react to the movable accessories, causing unintended movement by the player. There is a risk that production and control will be performed.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1.
an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, sound emission control device 90) for receiving an operation by a player;
special effect executing means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation receiving means;
Movable role product control means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable role product (first role product 310),
The game machine, wherein the special effect execution means does not execute the special effect while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group,
Detection of the touch sensor can be preferably performed. Specifically, by not executing the special effect during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the movable accessory and to suppress the execution of control unintended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
When operating the movable accessory, storing information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in an operating state storage unit (various flag storage area),
The special production execution means is
A game machine, wherein the operation state storage unit is referred to and the special effect is not executed when the movable accessory is in operation.

According to feature B2 of the present invention group,
The movable accessory control means stores information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in the operation state storage unit, and the special effect execution unit refers to the operation state storage unit to determine whether the movable accessory is in operation. Since it is determined whether or not there is a flag, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations caused by the movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration that only checks the presence or absence of the flag. In addition, since there is no need to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function to prevent malfunction of the operation receiving means due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. .

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B2 of the invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the movement of the movable accessory ends, information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion stored in the operating state storage unit is cleared.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group,
When the movement of the movable accessory ends, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion stored in the operation state storage unit. can be executed. As a result, the player can enjoy the special performance, and the amusement is improved.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3 of the invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation reception notification means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for informing that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group,
Since it is notified that the player's operation is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's taste is improved.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B4 of the invention group,
The game machine characterized in that the operation reception notification means randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group,
Since the fact that the player's operation is being accepted is randomly notified, the player can be given an expectation that a special performance may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is a sense of anticipation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5 of the invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, expects the player to expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by executing a notice performance).

According to feature B6 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is executed, it is possible to further improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the invention group,
The game machine, wherein the special effect executing means does not perform a lottery as to whether or not to perform the expected effect when the movable accessory is in motion.

According to feature B7 of the group of the present invention,
When the movable accessory is in operation, the special performance execution means does not perform a lottery as to whether or not to perform the expected performance, so that the resources of the special performance execution means can be allocated to other uses, and the MPU is improved. Improves utilization efficiency.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7 of the invention group,
Determination means (MPU 92) for determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means ends within a predetermined time,
The special production execution means is
When the action of the movable accessory ends within a predetermined time, the execution of the special presentation is not canceled, and the special presentation is performed after the action of the movable accessory ends.

According to feature B8 of the group of the present invention,
There is usually a time (time lag) of about one to several seconds from when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 until the player performs a touch operation. determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means ends within a predetermined time, and if the operation of the movable accessory ends within the predetermined time, without canceling the special performance, By executing the special performance after the motion of the movable accessory is finished, the number of times the occurrence of the special performance is canceled can be reduced, and the special performance can be performed as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player becoming bored, increase interest in the game, and allow the player to continue playing the game.

According to the characteristic group B of the present invention, by not executing a special effect during the operation period of the movable accessory, malfunction due to the movable accessory is prevented, and control that is not intended by the player is suppressed. Therefore, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that has operation means such as a touch sensor that receives an input when operated by a player. For example, in conventional gaming machines, a specific control state (a In some cases, an expected effect is executed to make the player expect that the game state will shift to a payout state.

However, in recent gaming machines, movable accessories are arranged around the symbol display device, and depending on the movement timing and movable range of the movable accessories, the touch sensor may react to the movable accessories, causing unintended movement by the player. There is a risk that an effect or control will be performed, and in such a case, the player will be dissatisfied due to the execution of an undesired control, for example, an effect.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1.
an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, sound emission control device 90) for receiving an operation by a player;
special effect executing means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation receiving means;
Movable role product control means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable role product (first role product 310),
The game machine, wherein the operation accepting means does not accept an operation by the player while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group,
Detection of the touch sensor can be preferably performed. Specifically, by not accepting an operation by the player during the operation period of the movable accessory, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the movable accessory and suppress unintended control by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A detector (touch sensor 57) that detects the operation of the player is provided,
A gaming machine characterized by ignoring the detection result output from the detector while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to feature C2 of the present invention group,
Since the operation receiving means ignores the detection result output from the detector that detects the operation of the player during the action of the movable accessory, it prevents malfunction due to the movable accessory and controls unintended by the player. can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in feature C2 of the invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
When operating the movable accessory, storing information indicating that the movable accessory is in operation in an operating state storage unit (various flag storage area),
The operation receiving means is
A gaming machine, wherein the operation state storage unit is referred to and the detection result from the detector is ignored when the movable accessory is in operation.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group,
Information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion is stored in the motion state storage unit, and the special effect execution means refers to the motion state storage unit to determine whether the movable accessory is in motion. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation due to the movable accessory and to suppress unintended control by the player with a simple configuration that only confirms the presence or absence of the flag. In addition, since there is no need to newly provide a mechanism for determining whether the movable accessory is in operation, it is possible to implement a function to prevent malfunction of the operation receiving means due to the movable accessory without increasing the cost. .

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in feature C3 of the invention group,
The movable accessory control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the movement of the movable accessory ends, information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion stored in the operating state storage unit is cleared.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group,
When the action of the movable accessory ends, the movable accessory control means clears the information indicating that the movable accessory is in motion stored in the motion state storage unit. It is possible to receive the operation of and execute a special effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the special performance, and the amusement is improved.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4 of the invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation reception notification means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for informing that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group,
Since it is notified that the player's operation is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's taste is improved.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C5 of the invention group,
The game machine characterized in that the operation reception notification means randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group,
Since the fact that the player's operation is being accepted is randomly notified, the player can be given an expectation that a special performance may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is a sense of anticipation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6 of the invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, expects the player to expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by executing a notice performance).

According to feature C7 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is executed, it is possible to further improve the attention of the player to the game.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7 of the present invention group,
Determination means (MPU 92) for determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means ends within a predetermined time,
The special production execution means is
When the action of the movable accessory ends within a predetermined time, the execution of the special presentation is not canceled, and the special presentation is performed after the action of the movable accessory ends.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group,
There is usually a time (time lag) of about one to several seconds from when the notice display is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 until the player performs a touch operation. determining whether or not the operation of the movable accessory by the movable accessory control means ends within a predetermined time, and if the operation of the movable accessory ends within the predetermined time, without canceling the special performance, By executing the special performance after the motion of the movable accessory is finished, the number of times the occurrence of the special performance is canceled can be reduced, and the special performance can be performed as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of the player becoming bored, increase interest in the game, and allow the player to continue playing the game.

According to the characteristic group C of the present invention, by not accepting the player's operation during the operation period of the movable role, malfunction due to the movable role is prevented, and control not intended by the player is performed. can be suppressed, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that has operation means such as a touch sensor that receives an input when operated by a player. For example, in conventional gaming machines, a specific control state (a In some cases, an expected effect is executed to make the player expect that the game state will shift to a payout state.

However, in recent gaming machines, movable accessories are arranged around the symbol display device, and depending on the movement timing and movable range of the movable accessories, the touch sensor may react to the movable accessories, causing unintended movement by the player. There is a risk that an effect or control will be performed, and in such a case, the player will be dissatisfied due to the execution of an undesired control, for example, an effect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
an operation receiving means (touch sensor 57, sound emission control device 90) for receiving an operation by a player;
special effect executing means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation receiving means;
Movable role product control means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable role product (first role product 310),
The operation receiving means is
While the movable accessory control means operates the movable accessory, the detection range of the operation of the player is changed so that the movable accessory does not fall within the operation of the operation receiving means. game machine.

According to feature D1 of the present invention group,
Detection of the touch sensor can be preferably performed. Specifically, by changing the detection range of the touch sensor while the movable accessory is operating, malfunction of the touch sensor due to the movable accessory is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A first detection range for detecting the player's operation does not overlap with the movement range of the movable accessory, and a second detection range for detecting the player's operation overlaps with the movement range of the movable accessory. and, while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory, detection of the player's operation within the second detection range is not performed. machine.

According to feature D2 of the present invention group,
While the movable accessory is operating, the player's operation is not detected within the second detection range where the detection range for detecting the player's operation overlaps with the operation range of the movable accessory, so that the operation of the player is not detected. Prevents malfunction of the touch sensor. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the invention group,
A gaming machine comprising detection range switching means for switching between the first and second detection ranges by changing the position or orientation of the operation receiving means.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group,
Since the detection range is switched by changing the position or orientation of the operation receiving means, it is possible to switch the detection range with one operation receiving means.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D3 of the invention group,
The operation receiving means is
A gaming machine comprising detection range switching means for switching between the first and second detection ranges by rotating the operation receiving means.

According to feature D4 of the group of the present invention,
By rotating the operation reception means, the detection range is switched without moving the position of the operation means, so the space for installing the operation reception means can be reduced.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the special effect executing means executes a different special effect depending on whether the player's operation is received in one of the first and second detection ranges.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group,
Since different special effects are executed depending on which detection range the player's operation is accepted, the player can enjoy different expected effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation position suggesting means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for suggesting a detection range of the player's operation by the operation accepting means.

According to feature D6 of the group of the present invention,
Since the detection range of the player's operation by the operation reception means is suggested, the player can be made to recognize the detection range of the operation reception means, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation reception notification means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for informing the player that an operation is being received.

According to feature D7 of the group of the present invention,
Since it is notified that the player's operation is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's taste is improved.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in feature D7 of the invention group,
The game machine characterized in that the operation reception notification means randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to feature D8 of the group of the present invention,
Since the fact that the player's operation is being accepted is randomly notified, the player can be given an expectation that a special performance may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is a sense of anticipation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, expects the player to expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by executing a notice performance).

According to feature D9 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is executed, it is possible to further improve the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group D of the present invention, by changing the detection range of the touch sensor while the movable accessory is operating, malfunction of the touch sensor due to the movable accessory is prevented, and the player's unintended operation is prevented. Since it is possible to suppress the execution of the control, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that has operation means such as a touch sensor that receives an input when operated by a player. For example, in conventional gaming machines, a specific control state (a In some cases, an expected effect is executed to make the player expect that the game state will shift to a payout state.

However, in recent gaming machines, movable accessories are arranged around the symbol display device, and depending on the movement timing and movable range of the movable accessories, the touch sensor may react to the movable accessories, causing unintended movement by the player. There is a risk that an effect or control will be performed, and in such a case, the player will be dissatisfied due to the execution of an undesired control, for example, an effect.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1.
an operation reception means (audio light emission control device 90) having a plurality of detectors (touch sensors 57A to 57D) with different detection ranges for receiving the operation of the player;
special effect executing means (audio emission control device 90, display control device 100) for executing a special effect according to the reception result of the operation receiving means;
Movable role product control means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for controlling the operation of the movable role product (first role product 310),
The operation receiving means is
While the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory, the detector for detecting the operation of the player is switched so that the movable accessory does not come within the operation range of the operation receiving means. Characteristic game machine.

According to feature E1 of the group of the present invention,
Detection of the touch sensor can be preferably performed. Specifically, while the movable accessory is operating, the touch sensor that detects the player's operation is switched to prevent the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the invention group,
The operation receiving means is
having at least first and second detectors;
The first detectors (touch sensors 57C, 57D) have a first detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player does not overlap with the movement range of the movable role,
The second detectors (touch sensors 57A, 57B) have a second detection range in which the detection range for detecting the operation of the player overlaps with the movement range of the movable role,
The operation receiving means is
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second detector does not detect the player's operation while the movable accessory control means is operating the movable accessory.

According to feature E2 of the group of the present invention,
Since the operation of the player is not detected by the second detector while the movable role is being operated, malfunction of the touch sensor due to the movable role is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to the execution of an effect not intended by the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game without feeling dissatisfaction due to execution of undesired control, for example, performance, and the satisfaction level of the player is improved.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the invention group,
At least one of the first and second detectors is composed of a set of touch sensors,
The operation receiving means is
A game characterized by recognizing that an operation by the player has been performed when the operation by the player is detected by the pair of touch sensors provided in at least one of the first and second detectors. machine.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group,
Only when a set of touch sensors provided in at least one of the first and second detectors detects the operation of the player, it is determined that the player has performed the operation of holding the hand over the hand, thereby preventing false detection due to noise, etc. can be prevented. More specifically, when the player accidentally touches the peripheral portion of the display screen G of the pattern display device 51 without intending to operate it, or when light from the outside of the window panel 22 is touched. It is possible to prevent erroneous detection due to reflection or the like.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E3 of the invention group,
The first and second detectors each comprise a set of touch sensors,
A gaming machine, wherein one touch sensor of said one set of touch sensors constituting said first and second detectors is commonly used by said first and second detectors.

According to feature E4 of the group of the present invention,
Since one of the plurality of touch sensors constituting the first and second detectors is commonly used, it is possible to reduce the number of touch sensors while preventing erroneous detection due to noise. manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E2 to feature E4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine, wherein the special effect executing means executes a different special effect depending on which of the first and second detection ranges the player's operation is accepted.

According to feature E5 of the group of the present invention,
Since different special effects are executed depending on which detection range the player's operation is accepted, the player can enjoy different expected effects. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation position suggesting means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for suggesting a detection range of the player's operation by the operation accepting means.

According to characteristic E6 of the group of the present invention,
Since the detection range of the player's operation by the operation reception means is suggested, the player can be made to recognize the detection range of the operation reception means, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising operation reception notification means (sound emission control device 90, display control device 100) for informing the player that an operation is being received.

According to feature E7 of the group of the present invention,
Since it is notified that the player's operation is being accepted, the player can surely recognize that the operation for the special effect is being accepted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special effect by performing the operation, and the player's taste is improved.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in feature E7 of the invention group,
The game machine characterized in that the operation reception notification means randomly determines whether or not to notify that the operation reception means is accepting the operation of the player.

According to characteristic E8 of the group of the present invention,
Since the fact that the player's operation is being accepted is randomly notified, the player can be given an expectation that a special performance may be performed even if there is no notification. In addition, since there is a sense of anticipation that a special effect may be performed even when there is no notification, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the game.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E8 of the present invention group,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, expects the player to expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by executing a notice performance).

According to characteristic E9 of the group of the present invention,
The special effect executing means, when the operation receiving means receives the player's operation, provides an expected effect (notice effect) that makes the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. Since it is executed, it is possible to further improve the attention of the player to the game.

According to the characteristic group E of the present invention, the touch sensor for detecting the player's operation is switched while the movable accessory is operating, thereby preventing the touch sensor from malfunctioning due to the movable accessory. Since it is possible to suppress the unintended control from being performed, the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine is known that has operation means such as a touch sensor that receives an input when operated by a player. For example, in conventional gaming machines, a specific control state (a In some cases, an expected effect is executed to make the player expect that the game state will shift to a payout state.

However, in recent gaming machines, movable accessories are arranged around the symbol display device, and depending on the movement timing and movable range of the movable accessories, the touch sensor may react to the movable accessories, causing unintended movement by the player. There is a risk that an effect or control will be performed, and in such a case, the player will be dissatisfied due to the execution of an undesired control, for example, an effect.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for game machines such as pachinko game machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 28... Operation button 36... 1st starting opening 37... 2nd starting opening 38... Variable winning device 38a... Large winning opening 38b... Open/close door 38c... Variable winning driving unit 39... Out port 51... Symbol display device 57... Touch sensor 60... Main control device 62... MPU 90... Sound emission control device 92... MPU 100... Display control device 102... MPU 310... First role Things (movable parts).

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a predetermined game area of a game board provided with image display means for displaying a variable display image in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner;
detection means that becomes a predetermined detection state when a predetermined object exists in a predetermined area that is the front side of the predetermined game area;
a movable member that is displaced between a first position and a second position;
displacement means for displacing the movable member;
a game machine comprising an effect executing means for causing the image display means to execute a game effect in progress of a game,
When the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the detection means can be in the predetermined detection state,
The production executing means is
When the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the displacing means, before the movable member is displaced from the first position to the second position, a first effect executing means capable of executing a first effect;
a second effect execution means for executing a second effect when the presence of the predetermined object in the predetermined area is detected by the detection means during a predetermined game period;
means for executing a corresponding reception effect when the detection means receives detection of the presence of the predetermined object during the predetermined game period,
This game machine is
When the first effect is being executed , if the remaining time of the first effect is longer than a predetermined time, the predetermined game period is not generated, and if the remaining time of the first effect is less than or equal to the predetermined time. In addition to being configured to generate the predetermined game period after executing the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured such that it is determined at random whether or not to generate a state in which the reception performance is executed.

Images